Home

User`s Manual - ASM spol. s ro

1. Dynamic Router Table VLAN ID Port Expiry Time Sec Figure 4 7 17 Dynamic Router Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description 184 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST e VLAN ID Display the current VLAN ID e Port Display the current dynamic router ports e Expiry Time Sec Display the current expiry time Static Router Table VLAN ID PortMask Figure 4 7 18 Static Router Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID Display the current VLAN ID e Port Mask Display the current port mask Forbidden Router Table Figure 4 7 19 Forbidden Router Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID Display the current VLAN ID e Port Mask Display the current port mask 185 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 7 2 7 IGMP Forward All This page provides IGMP Forward All The Forward All screen in Figure 4 7 20 appears IGMP Forward All Forward All VLAN ID 1 T Membership Apply Figure 4 7 20 Forward All Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID Select VLAN ID from this drop down list to assign IGMP membership e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Membership Select IGMP membership for each interface F
2. Defaulted and Expired The contents could be true or false If the contents are false the web will show if the contents are true the Web shows A T G S C D F and E for each content respectively 121 PLANET Networking A Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 5 VLAN 4 5 1 VLAN Overview A Virtual Local Area Network VLAN is a network topology configured according to a logical scheme rather than the physical layout VLAN can be used to combine any collection of LAN segments into an autonomous user group that appears as a single LAN VLAN also logically segment the network into different broadcast domains so that packets are forwarded only between ports within the VLAN Typically a VLAN corresponds to a particular subnet although not necessarily VLAN can enhance performance by conserving bandwidth and improve security by limiting traffic to specific domains A VLAN is a collection of end nodes grouped by logic instead of physical location End nodes that frequently communicate with each other are assigned to the same VLAN regardless of where they are physically on the network Logically a VLAN can be equated to a broadcast domain because broadcast packets are forwarded to only members of the VLAN on which the broadcast was initiated VLAN Overview i bar I I i I Ka d I I I i S3 i l I I it i I I i I i BR
3. IPv6 Based ACE Table User s Manual of LRP 422CST En a pa Name Destination IP Source Source IP Address Address Source Port Wildcard Ip Wildcard Range Aires Mask Address Mask Destination Port Range Flag IP ICMP ICMP SS LEE en The page includes the following fields Figure 4 10 12 Pv6 based ACE Table Page Screenshot Object ACL Name Sequence Action Protocol Source IP Address Source IP Address Wildcard Mask Destination IP Address Destination IP Address Wildcard Mask Source Port Range Destination Port Range Flag Set DSCP IP Precedence ICMP Type ICMP Code Modify Description Display the current ACL name Display the current sequence Display the current action Display the current protocol Display the current source IP address Display the current source IP address wildcard mask Display the current destination IP address Display the current destination IP address wildcard mask Display the current source port range Display the current destination port range Display the current flag set Display the current DSCP Display the current IP precedence Display the current ICMP Type Display the current ICMP code Edit Click to edit IPv6 based ACL parameter Delete Click to delete IPv6 based ACL entry 308 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 10 7 ACL Binding This page allows you to bind the Policy content to the appropr
4. Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 1 INTRODUCTION Thank you for purchasing PLANET Industrial 4 port Coax 2 port 10 100 1000T 2 port 100 1000X SFP Long Reach PoE over Coaxial Managed Switch LRP Managed Switch is used as an alternative name in this user s manual 1 1 Packet Contents Open the box of the LRP Managed Switch and carefully unpack it The box should contain the following items The LRP Managed Switch x 1 Quick Installation Guide x 1 RS232 to RJ45 Console Cable x 1 SFP Dust Cap x 2 BNC Female Dust Cap x 4 Warning Sticker x 4 DIN rail Kit x 1 Wall Mounting Kit x 1 If any item is found missing or damaged please contact your local reseller for replacement 10 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 1 2 Product Description PLANET Long Reach PoE Solution enables all enterprises and network service providers to set up an IP infrastructure in a remote location where 802 3af at PoE compliant powered devices can receive both data and power via PLANET switches and PLANET LRP extenders and injectors over a long distance but not limited to the normal 100 meters Intelligent Long Reach PoE Switch on Coaxial based Network PLANET LRP 422CST a brand new Multi channel Long Reach PoE Switch features an extended Ethernet and PoE networking of up to 1 kilometer over the existing coaxial cables going to multiple PoE compliant de
5. LLDP Port Overloading Table Interface Total Bytes nd Bytes Bes aa apabilities 45 1440 pet 21 Transmitted 9 Transmitted Overloading Not 46 1440 21 Transmitted 9 Transmitted Overloading Not 46 1440 i 21 Transmitted 9 Transmitted Overloading S i SSeS ES The page includes the following fields S S hb Z S S Left to 46 1440 KR l 21 Transmitted 9 Transmitted Overloading Not 45 1440 21 Transmitted 9 Transmitted Overloading Not 46 1440 21 Transmitted 9 Transmitted Overloading Not Not MED MED MED Network Extended 802 3 Optional MED 10 Transmitte d 10 Transmitted 6 Transmitted Transmitted S Transmitted S Transmitted Transmitted S Transmitted Transmitted Figure 4 12 16 LLDP Port Overloading Table Page Screenshot Object Interface Total Bytes Left to Send Bytes Status Mandatory TLVs MED Capabilities MED Location MED Network Policy MED Extended Power via MDI 802 3 TLVs Optional TLVs MED Inventory 802 1 TLVs Description The switch port number of the logical port Total number of bytes of LLDP information that is normally sent in a packet Total number of available bytes that can also send LLDP information in a packet Gives the status of the TLVs Displays if the mandatory group of TLVs were transmitted or overloaded Displays if the capabilities packets were transmitted or overloaded Displays if t
6. 34 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 2 2 4 Cabling w 10 100 1000BASE T All 10 100 1000BASE T ports come with auto negotiation capability They automatically support 1000BASE T 100BASE TX and 10BASE T networks Users only need to plug a working network device into one of the 10 100 1000BASE T ports and then turn on the LRP Managed Switch The port will automatically run in 10Mbps 20Mbps 100Mbps or 200Mbps and 1000Mbps or 2000Mbps after negotiating with the connected device WR 100BASE FX 1000BASE SX LX The LRP Managed Switch has four SFP interfaces that support 100 1000Mbps dual speed mode optional multi mode single mode 100BASE FX 1000BASE SX LX SFP module m Cabling Each 10 100 1000BASE T port uses an RJ45 socket similar to phone jacks for connection of unshielded twisted pair cable UTP The IEEE 802 3 802 3u 802 3ab Fast Gigabit Ethernet standard requires Category 5 UTP for 100Mbps 100BASE TX 10BASE T networks can use Cat 3 4 5 or 1000BASE T use 5 5e 6 UTP see table below Maximum distance is 100 meters 328 feet The 100BASE FX 1000BASE SX LX SFP slot uses an LC connector with optional SFP module Please see table below and know more about the cable specifications Port Type Cable Type Connector 10BASE T Cat3 4 5 2 pair RJ45 100BASE TX Cat5 UTP 2 pair RJ45 1000BASE T Cat5 5e 6 UTP 2 pair RJ45 100BASE FX 50 125um or 62 5 125um multi mode 9 125um single mode LC
7. Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST Console Information Information Name Information Value Login Authentication List Default Enable Authentication List Password Retry Count Stenttine Figure 4 9 22 Console Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e Login Authentication List e Enable Authentication List e Session Timeout e Password Retry Count e Silent Time Description Display the current login authentication list Display the current enable authentication list Display the current session timeout Display the current password retry count Display the current silent time 248 PLANET Networking amp Communication 4 9 5 2 Telnet User s Manual of LRP 422CST The Telnet Settings and Information screens in Figure 4 9 23 amp Figure 4 9 24 appear Telnet Settings Telnet Settings Enable 7 Default on Lisi Default Apply Disconnect Figure 4 9 23 Telnet Settings Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e Telnet Service e Login Authentication List e Enable Authentication List e Session Timeout e Password Retry Count e Silent Time Buttons Apply HEH Click to apply changes Disconnect Description Disable or enable Telnet service Select login authentication list from this drop down list Select enable
8. The Upgrade Manager screen in Figure 4 16 4 appears Upgrade Manager Upgrade Manager Upgrade Method TFIP Eva or lPve Address neiem image startup Configuration Backup Configuration Funning configuration Upgrade Upgrade Type Figure 4 16 4 Upgrade Manager Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Upgrade Method Select upgrade method from this drop down list e Server IP Fill in your TFTP server IP address e File Name The name of firmware image or configuration e Upgrade Type Select upgrade type e Image Select active or backup image Buttons Upgrade Click to upgrade image or configuration 361 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 16 5 Dual Image This page provides information about the active and backup firmware images in the device and allows you to revert to the backup image The web page displays two tables with information about the active and backup firmware images The Dual Image Configuration and Information screens in Figure 4 16 5 amp Figure 4 16 6 appear Dual Image Dual Image Configuration e Image 1 0b150820 bix Active O 1 06150820 bix Backup Apply Figure 4 15 5 Dual Image Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Active Image Select the active or backup image Buttons Apply Click to apply active image Images Infor
9. The page includes the following fields e IP Precedence Display the current CoS value e Mapping to Queue Display the current mapping to queue e Queue Display the current queue value e Mapping to IP Display the current mapping to IP Precedence Precedence 215 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 8 3 QoS Basic Mode 4 8 3 1 Global Settings The Basic Mode Global Settings and QoS Information screens in Figure 4 8 12 amp Figure 4 8 13 appear Global Settings Basic Mode Global Settings Figure 4 8 12 Basic Mode Global Settings Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Trust Mode Set the QoS mode Buttons Appl HE Click to apply changes 005 Informations Information Name Information Value Figure 4 8 13 QoS Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Trust Mode Display the current QoS mode 216 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 8 3 2 Port Settings The QoS Port Setting and Status screens in Figure 4 8 14 amp Figure 4 8 15 appear QoS Port Setting Select Ports Enabled Disabled Apply Figure 4 8 14 Basic Mode Global Settings Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select port number from this drop down list e Trust Mode Enable o
10. e Owner Specify an owner for the history Buttons Apply Click to apply changes RMON History Figure 4 14 8 RMON History Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Index Display the current index e Data Source Display the current data source e Bucket Requested Display the current bucket requested e Interval Display the current interval e Owner Display the current owner e Action Del Click maie to delete RMON history entry 348 PLANET Networking A Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 14 6 RMON History Log This page provides a detail of RMON history entries screen in Figure 4 14 9 appears RMON History Table RMON History Table History Index Select History No Data Available Figure 4 14 9 RMON History Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e History Index Select history index from this drop down list Buttons Appl PPY Click to apply changes 349 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 15 Power over Ethernet The LRP Managed Switch can easily build a power central controlled IP phone system IP camera system and AP group for the enterprise Without the power socket limitation the LRP Managed Switch makes the installation of cameras or WLAN APs easier and more efficient PoE Power Budget list for LRP Managed Switch Model Nam
11. 48 56V DC Redundant Power Input 2x 100 1000X SFP Slot 2X MII O00 TsRI455 A p gt RJ45 Console Cable gt IP30 RuggediGase H Z EE d EH Multi channel Long Reach Power over Ethernet To support the enterprises in easily building a multi channel and centrally controlled Long Reach PoE system the LRP 422CST works with the Long Reach PoE Extenders LRP 101CE via its 4 BNC ports being the Long Reach PoE injectors for all connected LRP Extenders Each of the BNC ports features long range data and power transmission for distance up to 1 000m 3 280ft over coaxial cable to the LRP Extender and another 100m over Ethernet cable to remote PoE IP camera PoE wireless AP or access control systems complied with 802 3af at PoE Power over Coaxial 802 3at PoE PoE LRP 101CE eg LRP 422CST IP Camera Coaxial Up to 1km Coaxial Coaxial W 100m TI 100m A UTP ef 700m LRP 101CE UTP e 100m Centralized Power Management With the centrally managed 150 watt PoE budget the LRP 422CST eliminates the need for an additional remote site power while allowing a single power source to provide power to both LRP extenders and the PoE powered devices at long range The Long Reach PoE capabilities provided help to reduce installation time and deployment costs for network devices as a result of freeing from restrictions of power outlet locations 12 PLANET Networking amp Communication U
12. Apply Figure 4 9 54 DAI VLAN Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID Indicates the ID of this particular VLAN Status Enables Dynamic ARP Inspection on the specified VLAN Options E Enable m Disable Buttons Apply Click to apply changes DAI VLAN Setting Figure 4 9 55 DAI VLAN Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN List Display the current VLAN list e Status Display the current status 273 PLANET Networking amp Communication 4 9 8 3 Port Setting User s Manual of LRP 422CST Configures switch ports as DAI trusted or untrusted and check mode DAI Port Setting screens in Figure 4 9 54 amp Figure 4 9 55 appear DAI Port Setting Type Sre Mac Chk Dst Mac Chk IP Chk IP Allow Zero Port Select Ports un Trusted Trusted Disabled QEnabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Apply The page includes the following fields Object e Port e Type e Src Mac Chk e Dst Mac Chk e IP Chk e IP Allow Zero Buttons Appl HE Click to apply changes Figure 4 9 56 DAI Port Setting Page Screenshot Description Select port from this drop down list Specify ARP Inspection is enabled on which ports Only when both Global Mode and Port Mode on a given port are enabled ARP Inspection is enabled on this given port Default All in
13. Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Byte 1240 Enable Disable Enable Disable e Enable O Disable ae 12 reese Enable Disable NetmaskLengih D na Enable Disable Bytes 0 31 Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Figure 4 9 67 Global DoS Setting Page Screenshot 285 PLANET lt Networking amp Communication The page includes the following fields Buttons Apply DMAC SMAC Land UDP Blat TCP Blat POD IPv6 Min Fragment ICMP Fragments IPv4 Ping Max Size IPv6 Ping Max Size Ping Max Size Setting Smurf Attack TCP Min Hdr Size TCP SYN SPORT lt 1024 Null Scan Attack X mas Scan Attack TCP SYN FIN Attack TCP SYN RST Attack TCP Fragment Offset 1 Click to apply changes User s Manual of LRP 422CST Description Enable or disable DoS check mode by DMAC SMAC Enable or disable DoS check mode by land Enable or disable DoS check mode by UDP blat Enable or disable DoS check mode by TCP blat Enable or disable DoS check mode by POD Enable or disable DoS check mode by IPv6 min fragment Enable or disable DoS check mode by ICMP fragment Enable or disable DoS check mode by IPv4 ping max size Enable or disable DoS check mode by IPv6 ping max size Set the max size for ping Enable or disable DoS check mode by smurf attack Enable or disable DoS check mode by TCP
14. Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST Multicast Receiver Multicast Transmitter Switch Switch Multicast Receiver Multicast Receiver D Figure 4 7 4 Multicast Flooding B Multicast Receiver IGMP Snooping Switch Multicast Transmitter Router IGMP Snooping IGMP Snooping Sai WII switch IGMP Snooping Multicast Switch Receiver Multicast Receiver D Figure 4 7 5 IGMP Snooping Multicast Stream Control 175 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST IGMP Versions 1 and 2 Multicast groups allow members to join or leave at any time IGMP provides the method for members and multicast routers to communicate when joining or leaving a multicast group IGMP version 1 is defined in RFC 1112 It has a fixed packet size and no optional data The format of an IGMP packet is shown below IGMP Message Format Octets 0 8 16 31 Type Response Time Checksum Group Address all zeros if this is a query The IGMP Type codes are shown below pe esning mn Membership Query if Group Address is 0 0 0 0 Specific Group Membership Query if Group Address is Present o oe Membership Report version 2 Leave a Group version 2 mm Membership Report version 1 IGMP packets enable multicast routers to keep track of the membership of multicast groups on their respective sub networks The following ou
15. Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 9 9 1 Port Settings IP Source Guard is a secure feature used to restrict IP traffic on DHCP snooping untrusted ports by filtering traffic based on the DHCP Snooping Table or manually configured IP Source Bindings It helps prevent IP spoofing attacks when a host tries to spoof and use the IP address of another host The IP Source Guard Port Setting and Information screens in Figure 4 9 61 amp Figure 4 9 62 appear E source Guard Port Setting Status Verify Source Max Binding Entry Max Binding Entry Entry Apply Figure 4 9 61 IP Source Guard Port Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select port from this drop down list e Status Enable or disable the IP source guard e Verify Source Configures the switch to filter inbound traffic based IP address or IP address and MAC address WR None Disables IP source guard filtering on the LRP Managed Switch m IP Enables traffic filtering based on IP addresses stored in the binding table WR IP and MAC Enables traffic filtering based on IP addresses and corresponding MAC addresses stored in the binding table e Max Binding Entry The maximum number of IP source guard that can be secured on this port Buttons Appl le Click to apply changes 280 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST IP Source Guard Port Information T
16. The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select Select port number from this drop down list e Enabled Indicates the port state operation Possible state are Enabled Start up the port manually Disabled Shut down the port manually Buttons Appl PPly Click to apply changes 90 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST SE Enable Link Figure 4 3 2B Port Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port This is the logical port number for this row e Description Click Edit to indicate the port name e Enable State Display the current port state e Link Status Display the current link status 4 3 3 Port Counters This page provides an overview of traffic and trunk statistics for all switch ports The Port Statistics screens in Figure 4 3 3 Figure 4 3 4 Figure 4 3 5 amp Figure 4 3 6 appear Port MIB Counters Settings Y al Qinterace O Etherlike ORMON Figure 4 3 3 Port MIB Counters Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select port number from this drop down list 91 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST e Mode Select port counters mode Option e All Interface Ether link RMON Interface Counters Counters Value e DR Reveied Unicast Packate dO Received Unknown Uncasi Packets 0 e TanemtU
17. Video Signaling for use in network topologies that require a separate policy for the video signaling than for the video media This application type should not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Video Conferencing application policy VLAN identifier VID for the port as defined in IEEE 802 1Q 2003 Tag indicating whether the specified application type is using a tagged or an untagged VLAN Untagged indicates that the device is using an untagged frame format and as such does not include a tag header as defined by IEEE 802 1Q 2003 In this case both the VLAN ID and the Layer 2 priority fields are ignored and only the DSCP value has relevance Tagged indicates that the device is using the IEEE 802 1Q tagged frame format and that both the VLAN ID and the Layer 2 priority values are being used as well as the DSCP value The tagged format includes an additional field known as the tag header The tagged frame format also includes priority tagged frames as defined by IEEE 802 1Q 2003 L2 Priority is the Layer 2 priority to be used for the specified application type L2 Priority may specify one of eight priority levels 0 through 7 as defined by IEEE 802 1D 2004 A value of 0 represents use of the default priority as defined in IEEE 802 1D 2004 DSCP value to be used to provide Diffserv node behavior for the specified application type as defined in IETF RFC 2474 DSCP may contain one of 64
18. e ACL e Port Security Violation e DHCP Rate Limit e ARP Rate Limit Description The period in seconds for which a port will be kept disabled in the event of a port error is detected and the port action shuts down the port Enable or disable the port error disabled function to check status by BPDU guard Enable or disable the port error disabled function to check status by self loop Enable or disable the port error disabled function to check status by broadcast flood Enable or disable the port error disabled function to check status by unknown multicast flood Enable or disable the port error disabled function to check status by unicast flood Enable or disable the port error disabled function to check status by ACL Enable or disable the port error disabled function to check status by port security violation Enable or disable the port error disabled function to check status by DHCP rate limit Enable or disable the port error disabled function to check status by ARP rate limit 102 PLANET Networking amp Communication Buttons Apply The page includes the following fields User s Manual of LRP 422CST Click to apply changes Error Disable Information Information Name Information Value Recovery Interval HN BPOU Guard Disable self Loop Disable Broadcast Flood Disable Unknown Multicast Flood Disable Unicast Flood Disable ACL Disable Port Security Violation Disable DAC
19. s Manual of LRP 422CST The LRP Managed Switch gives you the flexibility to access and manage it using any or all of the following methods E An administration console E Web browser interface Di An external SNMP based network management application The administration console and Web browser interface support are embedded in the LRP Managed Switch software and are available for immediate use Each of these management methods has their own advantages Table 3 1 compares the three management methods Method Console e Web Browser e SNMP Agent e Advantages No IP address or subnet needed Text based Telnet functionality and HyperTerminal built into Windows 95 98 NT 2000 ME XP operating systems Secure Ideal for configuring the switch remotely Compatible with all popular browsers Can be accessed from any location Most visually appealing Communicates with switch functions at the MIB level Based on open standards Disadvantages Must be near the switch or use dial up connection Not convenient for remote users Modem connection may prove to be unreliable or slow Security can be compromised hackers need only know the IP address and subnet mask May encounter lag times on poor connections Requires SNMP manager software Least visually appealing of all three methods Some settings require calculations Security can be compromised hackers only need to know the community name Table 3 1 Comparison of Management
20. 4 8 4 3 Egress Queue The Egress Queue Bandwidth Control Settings and Status screens in Figure 4 8 20 amp Figure 4 8 21 appear Egress Queue Bandwidth Control Egress Queue Bandwidth Control Settings DP ort State CIR Kbps Apply Figure 4 8 20 Egress Queue Bandwidth Settings Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select port number from this drop down list e Queue Select queue number from this drop down list e State Enable or disable the port rate policer The default value is Disabled e CIR Kbps Configure the CIR for the port policer The default value is unlimited Valid values are in the range 0 to 1000000 Buttons Appl PPY Click to apply changes FE1 Egress Per Queue Status Queue ID Rate Limit Kbps Queue D of eg DS Figure 4 8 21 Egress Queue Status Page Screenshot 221 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST The page includes the following fields Object Description e Queue ID Display the current queue ID e Rate Limit Kbps Display the current rate limit 4 8 5 Voice VLAN 4 5 8 1 Introduction to Voice VLAN Configure the switch port rate limit for the switch port on this page Voice VLAN is specially configured for the user voice data traffic By setting a Voice VLAN and adding the ports of the connected voice equipments to Voice VLAN the user will be able to configure QoS Quality
21. Figure 4 2 32 SNMPv1 2 Host Status Page Screenshot 83 The page includes the following fields PLANET Networking amp Communication Object Server Address SNMP Version Notify Type Community Name UDP Port Time Out Retries Action User s Manual of LRP 422CST Description Display the current server address Display the current SNMP version Display the current notify type Display the current community name Display the current UDP port Display the current time out Display the current retry times Ze Delete the SNMPv1 2 host entry 4 2 7 8 SNMPv3 Notification Recipients Configure SNMPv3 notification recipients on this page The SNMPv1 2 Notification Recipients screens in Figure 4 2 33 amp Figure 4 2 34 appear SNMPv3 Host Setting Server Address ee Tee Jess O 255 Add The page includes the following fields Buttons Object Server Address Notify Type User Name UDP Port Time Out Retries Figure 4 2 33 SNMPv3 Notification Recipients Page Screenshot Description Indicates the SNMP trap destination address It allows a valid IP address in dotted decimal notation x y z w It can also represent a legally valid IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 Set the notify type in traps or informs Indicates the user string when send SNMP trap packet Indicates the SNMP trap destination port SNMP Agent will send SNMP message via this port the port range is 1 65535
22. It guarantees the best performance for VoIP and video stream transmission and empowers the enterprises to take full advantage of the limited network resources Powerful Security PLANET LRP 422CST offers comprehensive IPv4 IPv6 Layer 2 to Layer 4 Access Control List ACL for enforcing security to the edge It can be used to restrict network access by denying packets based on source and destination IP address TCP UDP ports or defined typical network applications Its protection mechanism also comprises 802 1X port based user and device authentication which can be deployed with RADIUS to ensure the port level security and block illegal users With the Protected Port function communication between edge ports can be prevented to guarantee user privacy Furthermore Port Security function allows to limit the number of network devices on a given port Advanced Network Security The LRP 422CST also provides DHCP Snooping IP Source Guard and Dynamic ARP Inspection functions to prevent IP snooping from attack and discard ARP packets with invalid MAC address The network administrators can now build highly secure corporate networks with considerably less time and effort than before Friendly and Secure Management For efficient management the LRP 422CST is equipped with console Web Telnet and SNMP management interfaces With the built in Web based management interface the LRP 422CST offers an easy to use platform independent management and con
23. MLD Group Table VLAN ID Group IP Address Life Sec Figure 4 7 26 MLD Group Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID Display the current VID e Group IP Address Display multicast IP address for a specific multicast service 192 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST e Member Port Display the current member port e Type Member types displayed include Static or Dynamic depending on selected options e Life Sec Display the current life 4 7 4 4 MLD Router Setting Depending on your network connections MLD snooping may not always be able to locate the MLD querier Therefore if the MLD querier is a known multicast router switch connected over the network to an interface port or trunk on your LRP Managed Switch you can manually configure the interface and a specified VLAN to join all the current multicast groups supported by the attached router This can ensure that multicast traffic is passed to all the appropriate interfaces within the LRP Managed Switch The MLD Router Setting screens in Figure 4 7 27 amp Figure 4 7 28 appear MLD Router Port Setting Add Router Port VLAN ID Static Ports Select Forbid Ports Select Select VLANs Select Static Ports Select Forbidden Por Add Figure 4 7 27 Add Router Port Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID Selects the VLAN to propagate all
24. PLANET Networking amp Communication Www PLANET com tw Industrial 4 port Coax 2 port 10 100 1000T 2 port 100 1000X SFP Long Reach PoE over Coaxial Managed Switch gt LRP 422CST PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST Trademarks Copyright PLANET Technology Corp 2015 Contents are subject to revision without prior notice PLANET is a registered trademark of PLANET Technology Corp All other trademarks belong to their respective owners Disclaimer PLANET Technology does not warrant that the hardware will work properly in all environments and applications and makes no warranty and representation either implied or expressed with respect to the quality performance merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose PLANET has made every effort to ensure that this User s Manual is accurate PLANET disclaims liability for any inaccuracies or omissions that may have occurred Information in this User s Manual is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of PLANET PLANET assumes no responsibility for any inaccuracies that may be contained in this User s Manual PLANET makes no commitment to update or keep current the information in this User s Manual and reserves the right to make improvements to this User s Manual and or to the products described in this User s Manual at any time without notice If you find information in this manual tha
25. amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST CH From disabled to blocking Switch Blocking Listening Disable Learning Forwarding Dei hh Figure 4 6 1 STP Port State Transitions You can modify each port state by using management software When you enable STP every port on every switch in the network goes through the blocking state and then transitions through the states of listening and learning at power up If properly configured each port stabilizes to the forwarding or blocking state No packets except BPDUs are forwarded from or received by STP enabled ports until the forwarding state is enabled for that port 2 STP Parameters STP Operation Levels The Switch allows for two levels of operation the switch level and the port level The switch level forms a spanning tree consisting of links between one or more switches The port level constructs a spanning tree consisting of groups of one or more ports The STP operates in much the same way for both levels On the switch level STP calculates the Bridge Identifier for each switch and then sets the Root Bridge and the Designated Bridges On the port level STP sets the Root Port and the Designated Ports The following are the user configurable STP parameters for the switch level 154 PLANET Networking amp Communication Parameter Bridge Identifier Not user configurable except by setting priority below Priority Hello Time Maximum Ag
26. and PC 2 will receive the packet through Port 1 and Port 2 2 While the packet leaves Port 1 and Port 2 it will be stripped away its tag becoming an untagged packet a Untagged packet entering VLAN 3 1 While PC 4 transmits an untagged packet enters Port 4 the switch will tag it with a VLAN Tag 3 PC 5 and PC 6 will receive the packet through Port 5 and Port 6 2 While the packet leaves Port 5 it will be stripped away its tag becoming an untagged packet 3 While the packet leaves Port 6 it will be kept as a tagged packet with VLAN Tag 3 Setup Steps 1 Create VLAN Group 2 and 3 Add VLAN group 2 and group 3 VLAN Table VLAN ID VLAN Name VLAN Type 147 PLANET PE User s Manual of LRP 422CST akan Vii ened OnE ie pe Port 1 Port 2 and Port 3 VLAN Mode Hybrid PVID 2 Port 4 Port 5 and Port 6 VLAN Mode Hybrid PVID 3 Port VLAN Status Hybrid Hybrid ALL E Hybrid ALL OI LO oes fea fat ALL VLAN ID 2 C E m TI Port 1 amp 2 Untagged Port 3 Tagged Port 4 6 Excluded Port to VLAN Settings VLAN ID i Hybrid LO Forbidden O Excluded Tagged O Untagged Jo VLAN ID 3 Port 4 amp 5 Untagged Port 6 Tagged Port 1 3 Excluded v Port to VLAN Settings GE GE2 GE3 GE4 E5 Hybrid Forbidden Excluded Tagged Untagged G Hybrid Forbidden Excluded O Tagged
27. code point values 0 through 63 A value of 0 represents use of the default DSCP value as defined in RFC 2475 327 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST Buttons Apply Click to apply changes LLDP MED Network Policy Table Delete f Network Policy Number Application VLAN ID VLAN Tag L Priority DSCP Value Figure 4 12 11 LLDP MED Network Policy Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Network Policy Display the current network policy number Number e Application Display the current application e VLAN ID Display the current VLAN ID e VLAN Tag Display the current VLAN tag status e L2 Priority Display the current L2 priority e DSCP Value Display the current DSCP value Buttons Delete Click to delete LLDP MED network policy table entry 4 12 7 MED Port Setting The Port LLDP MED Configuration Port Setting Table screens in Figure 4 12 12 amp Figure 4 12 13 appear e LLDP MED E MED E fia ME D Op tional TLV Select Optional TLVs Select Optional TLVs Apply Figure 4 12 12 Port LLDP MED Configuration Page Screenshot 328 PLANET Networking amp Communication The page includes the following fields Object e Port Select e MED Enable e MED Optional TVLs e MED Network Policy Buttons Appl PPY Click to apply changes User s Manual of LRP 422CST Description Select port from thi
28. damage it 4 15 2 System Configuration In a power over Ethernet system operating power is applied from a power source PSU power supply unit over the LAN infrastructure to powered devices PDs which are connected to ports Under some conditions the total output power required by PDs can exceed the maximum available power provided by the PSU The system with a PSU is capable of supplying less power than the total potential power consumption of all the PoE ports in the system In order to maintain the function of the majority of the ports power management is implemented The PSU input power consumption is monitored by measuring voltage and current The input power consumption is equal to the system s aggregated power consumption The power management concept allows all ports to be active and activates additional ports as long as the aggregated power of the system is lower than the power level at which additional PDs cannot be connected When this value is exceeded ports will be deactivated according to user defined priorities The power budget is managed according to the following user definable parameters maximum available power ports priority and maximum allowable power per port Reserved Power There are five modes for configuring how the ports PDs may reserve power and when to shut down ports a Allocation mode In this mode the user allocates the amount of power that each port may reserve The allocated reserved power for each
29. l I i i iI l i E I I i I i BR PC 1 PC 2 PC 3 E PC 4 PC 5 PC 6 Untagged Untagged Tagged 4 Untagged Untagged Tagged i I i i I l VLAN 2 E VLAN 3 Ii J engm mengem gem mm mem mm mm ER ER ER ER NR ER ER mm ER IR o When een mmm em om mm em e em GR GR ER ER a em ER E ER ER ER em IR ER 1 No matter what basis is used to uniquely identify end nodes and assign these nodes VLAN membership packets cannot cross VLAN without a network device performing a routing function between the VLAN The LRP Managed Switch supports IEEE 802 1Q VLAN The port untagging function can be used to remove the 802 1 tag from packet headers to maintain compatibility with devices that are tag unaware The LRP Managed Switch s default is to assign all ports to a single 802 1Q VLAN named DEFAULT_VLAN As new VLAN is created the member ports assigned to the new VLAN will be removed from the DEFAULT_ VLAN port member list The DEFAULT_VLAN has a VID 1 122 PLANET e Networking amp Communication This section has the following items User s Manual of LRP 422CST E Management VLAN Configures the management VLAN E Create VLAN Creates the VLAN group S Interface Settings Configures mode and PVID on the VLAN port a Port to VLAN Configures the VLAN membership a Port VLAN Membership Displays the VLAN membership x Protocol VLAN Group Configures the protocol VLAN group Setting a Protocol VLAN Port Configures the prot
30. non condensing PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 2 INSTALLATION This section describes the hardware features and installation of the LRP Managed Switch with DIN rail or wall mount For easier management and control of the LRP Managed Switch familiarize yourself with its display indicators and ports Front panel illustrations in this chapter display the unit LED indicators Before connecting any network device to the LRP Managed Switch please read this chapter completely 2 1 Hardware Description 2 1 1 Physical Dimensions Dimensions W x D x H 72 x 107 x 152mm Oo A OOOOoOOOO0O CO DOoODO OO DO OOOO SopooocGo oooooo0ooo0 DOOOOO0OO0O OO DOOOOOODO OO oooooooocGo Dooooo0 og oooooo obt D O 0 i DD Il Ly DOC E Mounting Kit Side View Front View WE um U Hoia E z gene Li H 1 el a a J D i a P r 4 LER AICAT i uf Hk 4 2 Ba KN a CR ki el CG 5 F Bottom View Mounting Kit DODOoOOoDOO0OOOOOO0DOO HUDOOopnppgoaOOUuOOOO OO Dpoonpnoopopoonpogonpo Dimensions unit mm 24 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 2 1 2 Front Panel foc NK PoE In use 115200 N 8 1 on CG Gei Ein ei Du Wee A y Ri ma Ge x a S ER d al Ge q e vi LRP 422CST Mi Long Reach P
31. s Manual of LRP 422CST The page includes the following fields Object Description e Target Display the current log target e Severity Display the current log severity e Category Display the current log category e Total Entries Display the current log entries Logging Messages Clear buffered messages Refresh No Timestamp 1 Category _ Severity Message dan 01 2000 05 2 all Logging messages from the logging buffered are cleared Figure 4 2 20 Logging Messages Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e No This is the number for logs e Timestamp Display the time of log e Category Display the category type e Severity Display the severity type e Message Display the log message Buttons Clear Click to clear the log Refresh Click to refresh the log 73 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 2 7 SNMP Management 4 2 7 1 SNMP Overview The Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is an application layer protocol that facilitates the exchange of management information between network devices It is part of the Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP protocol suite SNMP enables network administrators to manage network performance find and solve network problems and plan for network growth An SNMP managed network consists of four components Network management stations NMSs SNMP agent management infor
32. 2 MING Kl Sao sees ceea eee psaecensoeseediae ia EE a aan a a ia a eean reier 282 ATO eine 283 EE 285 AO 11 A Ee Le Al GS SUING EE 285 A9 Wee DF ENEE 288 EW OWN E ie E 290 e NS a e eG 0 1072 Em ue EE 290 A Ae ir OWL de EE 291 aaa rasa seca tiamwe stra sane e N E 293 4 10 11 MAC yc hci cle Re Reenter een nene ener eerie ne ree eee eee eto mene eee eee ee eee ee eee ee 293 4 10 2 MAC based ACEN 294 e EN VAD SG ACI EE 297 A104 PvA based ACE ee 298 4 10 5 IPv6 pased Ceeee ene ene ee ee ee en ee eee eee eee 303 4 10 6 IPv6 based ACE ieee 304 AIOT ACL ENOR EE 309 AT MAG Addres E ca 311 uk Ee MAG SENG EE 311 TA A PUN EE 312 eh RR nl Lee le e EE 313 e T14 Dynamo Ee ANN E 314 zu KA WE KE 316 4 12 1 Link Layer Discovery Protocol sscanisnassntsivestenensdastnrevrendemithasnettoualodeanioabluettasdantibabanenine Wanttuahontnoiubeunniivateonmautents 316 ASN 2 2 LLDP Global Se UNO EE 316 ATZ De ln OEN eee eee eee eee ee eee eee 319 412A CLDR Local e 322 4129 LLDP Remote DEVICE ee 324 A126 MED NGIWOLK POIG E 325 A127 MED Port El e EE 328 4 128 DD PSO ACN G sriain rE EE E Er eE EEE TAEAE NAE EOS 332 GEB EB alee EE e E EE EE E E one AE A OE eee AE N E EE E EE 333 AT DAGNO DE 335 A131 Cable Re 8 EE 335 EE 337 AGN Sid WN ho ee 337 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST See EN eat oa ee il lt ee E ee eee ee nee eee 338 ATA RMON BE 339 ATA Te e EE e 339 ATAA RMON EVENE EE 342 A
33. 20 seconds 15 seconds 200 000 100Mbps Fast Ethernet ports 20 000 1000Mbps Gigabit Ethernet ports The Switch s factory default setting should cover the majority of installations However it is advisable to keep the default settings as set at the factory unless it is absolutely necessary The user changeable parameters in the Switch are as follows Priority A Priority for the switch can be set from 0 to 65535 0 is equal to the highest Priority 155 A PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST Hello Time The Hello Time can be from 1 to 10 seconds This is the interval between two transmissions of BPDU packets sent by the Root Bridge to tell all other Switches that it is indeed the Root Bridge If you set a Hello Time for your Switch and it is not the Root Bridge the set Hello Time will be used if and when your Switch becomes the Root Bridge The Hello Time cannot be longer than the Max Age Otherwise a configuration error will occur Note Max Age The Max Age can be from 6 to 40 seconds At the end of the Max Age if a BPDU has still not been received from the Root Bridge your Switch will start sending its own BPDU to all other Switches for permission to become the Root Bridge If it turns out that your Switch has the lowest Bridge Identifier it will become the Root Bridge Forward Delay Timer The Forward Delay can be from 4 to 30 seconds This is the time any port on
34. 422CST fn a en Name Source IP Adress IP Address BEEN Address Port Destination Port Range Flag IP ICMP ICMP SS EE en The page includes the following fields Wildcard IP Wildcard Range ie Mask Address Mask Figure 4 10 8 IPv4 based ACE Table Page Screenshot Object ACL Name Sequence Action Protocol Source IP Address Source IP Address Wildcard Mask Destination IP Address Destination IP Address Wildcard Mask Source Port Range Destination Port Range Flag Set DSCP IP Precedence ICMP Type ICMP Code Modify Description Display the current ACL name Display the current sequence Display the current action Display the current protocol Display the current source IP address Display the current source IP address wildcard mask Display the current destination IP address Display the current destination IP address wildcard mask Display the current source port range Display the current destination port range Display the current flag set Display the current DSCP Display the current IP precedence Display the current ICMP Type Display the current ICMP code Edit Click to edit IPv4 based ACL parameter Delete Click to delete IPv4 based ACL entry 302 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 10 5 IPv6 based ACL This page shows the ACL status by different ACL users Each row describes the ACE that is defined It is a confl
35. Authentication Dial in User Service RADIUS E Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus TACACS WR Local user name and Privilege Level control 228 PLANET Networking A Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 9 1 1 Understanding IEEE 802 1X Port based Authentication The IEEE 802 1X standard defines a client server based access control and authentication protocol that restricts unauthorized clients from connecting to a LAN through publicly accessible ports The authentication server authenticates each client connected to a switch port before making available any services offered by the switch or the LAN Until the client is authenticated 802 1X access control allows only Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN EAPOL traffic through the port to which the client is connected After authentication is successful normal traffic can pass through the port This section includes this conceptual information e Device Roles e Authentication Initiation and Message Exchange e Ports in Authorized and Unauthorized States E Device Roles With 802 1X port based authentication the devices in the network have specific roles as shown below Authentication server d Authentication server RADIUS Server TACACS Server Authenticator Internet s PLANET 802 14 aware Switch Intran Supplicant Client with 802 1 authentication Figure 4 9 1 Client the device workst
36. Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 9 1 5 Authenticated Host The Authenticated Host Table screen in Figure 4 9 9 appears Authenticated Hosts Authenticated Host Table User Name Port Session Time Authentication Method MAC Address Figure 4 9 9 Authenticated Host Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e User Name Display the current user name e Port Display the current port number e Session Time Display the current session time e Authentication Method Display the current authentication method e MAC Address Display the current MAC address 4 9 2 RADIUS Server This page is to configure the RADIUS server connection session parameters The RADIUS Settings screens in Figure 4 9 10 Figure 4 9 11 amp Figure 4 9 12 appears Radius Server Settings Use Default Parameters Pv4 f IPve Range 1 10 Default 3 sec Range 1 30 Default 3 min Range 0 2000 Default 0 0 63 ASCI Alohanumeric Characters Used Figure 4 9 10 Use Default Parameters Page Screenshot 238 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST The page includes the following fields Buttons Apply Object Description e Retries Timeout is the number of seconds in the range 1 to 10 to wait for a reply from a RADIUS server before retransmitting the request e Timeout for Reply Retransmit is the number of tim
37. Don t Care Any ODSCP to match o Range O 63 OIP Precedence to match Range 0 7 Any Select fram list Protocol ID to match Range D 255 Ary User Defined Range 0 255 Add Figure 4 10 11 IP based ACE Page Screenshot 304 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST The page includes the following fields Source IP Address Source IP Address Value Source IP Prefix Length Destination IP Address Destination IP Address Value Destination IP Prefix Length Source Port Object Description e ACL Name Select ACL name from this drop down list Sequence Set the ACL sequence Action Indicates the forwarding action of the ACE E Permit Frames matching the ACE may be forwarded and learned E Deny Frames matching the ACE are dropped RW Shutdown Port shutdown is disabled for the ACE Protocol Specify the protocol filter for this ACE E Any IP No protocol filter is specified E Select from list If you want to filter a specific protocol with this ACE choose this value and select protocol for this drop down list Specify the Source IP address filter for this ACE E Any No source IP address filter is specified WR User Defined If you want to filter a specific source IP address with this ACE choose this value A field for entering a source IP address value appears When User Defined is selected for the sourc
38. E E 3 E E E E a2 1A Disabled Lu Lu Lu Lu Lu Lu Lu Lu O O OI OI DI O1 O O m m m m m m m m m m Lm Lm a LC IC LC Figure 4 9 6 802 1X Port Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields 234 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Mode pps Display the current mode e Status pps Display the current status e Periodic Reauthentication Display the current periodic reauthentication e Reauthentication Period Display the current reauthentication period e Quiet Period Display the current quiet period e Supplicant Timeout Display the current supplicant timeout e Max EAP Requests Display the current Max EAP requests e Modify Click Edit to edit 802 1X port setting parameter 4 9 1 4 Guest VLAN Setting Overview When a Guest VLAN enabled port s link comes up the switch starts transmitting EAPOL Request Identity frames If the number of transmissions of such frames exceeds Max Reauth Count and no EAPOL frames have been received in the meantime the switch considers entering the Guest VLAN The interval between transmission of EAPOL Request Identity frames is configured with EAPOL Timeout If Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen is enabled the port will now be placed in the Guest VLAN If disabled the switch will first check its history to see if an EAPOL frame has previously been
39. FOS EE 238 EE geen 238 A93 TACGACS EEN 242 EE 244 4 9 4 1 MOI ME 245 EE E Ee E EE 246 Eeer 247 AYA COM a 247 4 9 5 2 VON Us wt epreteeere uted ensaieiedadedncandnnestenanbivadetenansneied edeheden snaeoianscebutiadcncsted sei wien tasavisastet sariedadedocansusetasesebtensanvetsn 249 Bo oo Bo p PAEA eee eee ee eee ee eee ee E ee 251 EN RK EE 253 KSAT TE e e a R sesh yas aeins oot rte R E E E I 254 4 9 6 Management Access Method 255 W el EE 255 EE Eege 257 AIr DACP SNOODIO ee 258 4 9 7 1 DHCP Snooping Overview ccccccccccseeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeessaeeeeseaeeesseeeeeeeseeeeeesaneeesaaes 258 SE Da le ee e A E N eer eee eee eee eee 259 E NEAN SN EE 260 A APOE EN D 262 e ELE 264 ER Ree E EE 265 SY ae E Run EE 267 4 9 7 8 Option 82 Global Setting ce cccccsecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeesseeeeeseeeeesseeeeessaeseeeeseeeeeesenseesaees 268 4 9 7 9 Option 82 Port Setting EE 269 4 9 10 Option 82 Circu ID SCUING EE 271 4 9 8 Dynamic ARP INS PSCUON EE 272 E Eeler e E E E E E E E ee E ee ee eee 2 2 4 9 8 2 VLAN Setting cccccccccccccceeee cease eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeessseeeeeeasaaaaaaeseseeeeeeeeeeees 273 val Pe oS PO eN E 274 hei UAV SUC ee 276 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 9 8 5 Rate 9 E 277 e EE E E e DEE 279 BESS ee ON cae otc stamteeeant A r A 280 4 9 9
40. Guest VLAN Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Key String The secret key with up to 63 characters long is shared between the TACACS server and the switch e Timeout for Reply Retransmit is the number of times in the range 1 to 30 a TACACS request is retransmitted to a server that is not responding If the server has not responded after the last retransmit it is considered to be dead Buttons Appl HEH Click to apply changes New TACACS Server Server Definition By IP Address By Name sewer Server Timeout sg Use Default 1 30 secs Add Figure 4 9 14 New RADIUS Server Page Screenshot 242 PLANET Networking amp Communication The page includes the following fields Object e Server Definition Buttons Add Server IP Server Port Server Key Server Timeout Server Priority User s Manual of LRP 422CST Description Set the server definition Address of the TACACS server IP name Network TCP port of TACACS server used for authentication messages Range 1 65535 Default 49 The key is shared between the TACACS Authentication Server and the switch The number of seconds the switch waits for a reply from the server before it resends the request Set the server priority Click to add RADIUS server setting TACACS Servers The page includes the following fields Object IP Address Port Key Timeout R
41. ID Group IP Address Member Ports Modify User s Manual of LRP 422CST Description Display the current VLAN ID Display the current group IP address Display the current member ports Edit Click to edit parameter This page provides Multicast Database The IGMP Group Table screen in Figure 4 7 14 appears The page includes the following fields IGMP Group Table IGMP Group Table VLAN ID Group IP Address Life Sec Object VLAN ID Group IP Address Member Port Type Life Sec Figure 4 7 14 IGMP Group Table Page Screenshot Description Display the current VID Display multicast IP address for a specific multicast service Display the current member port Member types displayed include Static or Dynamic depending on selected options Display the current life 182 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 7 2 5 IGMP Router Setting Depending on your network connections IGMP snooping may not always be able to locate the IGMP querier Therefore if the IGMP querier is a known multicast router switch connected over the network to an interface port or trunk on your LRP Managed Switch you can manually configure the interface and a specified VLAN to join all the current multicast groups supported by the attached router This can ensure that multicast traffic is passed to all the appropriate interfaces within the LRP Managed Switch The IGMP Router Setting and
42. LLDP Port Configuration and Optional TLVs Selection Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select Select port from this drop down list e State Enables LLDP messages transmit and receive modes for LLDP Protocol Data Units Options TX only a RX only E Tx RX E Disabled e Port Select Select port from this drop down list e Optional TLV Select Configures the information included in the TLV field of advertised messages E System Name When checked the System Name is included in LLDP information transmitted E Port Description When checked the Port Description is included in LLDP information transmitted E System Description When checked the System Description is included in LLDP information transmitted E System Capability When checked the System Capability is included in LLDP information transmitted 319 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST WM 802 3 MAC PHY When checked the 802 3 MAC PHY is included in LLDP information transmitted M 802 3 Link Aggregation When checked the 802 3 Link Aggregation is included in LLDP information transmitted E 802 3 Maximum Frame Size When checked the 802 3 Maximum Frame Size is included in LLDP information transmitted E Management Address When checked the Management Address is included in LLDP information transmitted WM 802 1 PVID When checked the 802 1 PVID is included in LLDP
43. Manual uses Long Reach Ethernet coaxial extender as an example E Connect the Coaxial Cable 1 Insert the coaxial cable with one side being the 75 2 BNC plug connector into the Long Reach Ethernet coaxial interface 2 Connect the other end of the cable to a device with Long Reach Ethernet coaxial extender installed 3 Tighten the BNC male connector gently 40 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST j RJ45 wa PoE PT Camera oC 2V RG6 750 Coaxial Cable 2 LRP 101CE LRP 422CST Figure 2 3 How to insert the coaxial cable from LRP Managed Switch 4 Enable Long Reach Power over Ethernet function for the all LRP ports from WebUI PoE Configuration PoE Configuration System PoE Admin Mode ro Ke Temperature Threshold bo Degrees C PoE Temperature 4AQ C f 1045F S i Power Budget 150 WM Access Control List KS MAC Address Table lt LLOP sn Diagnostics Power Se Current A Gef Port PoE Mode Schedule Priority Used mA Allocation PD Alive Check z w OOOO O OOOO O O oe 5 Check the LNK LED of the Long Reach Power over Ethernet interface on the front of the LRP Managed Switch Ensure that the Long Reach Power over Ethernet interface is operating correctly H Remove the connected the Coaxial Cable 1 Make sure there is no network activity anymore 2 Disable Long Reach Power over Ethern
44. Mapping Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Queue Select Queue value from this drop down list e DSCP Select DSCP value from this drop down list Buttons Apply Click to apply changes 212 PLANET geen Zeechner User s Manual of LRP 422CST DSCP Mapping Figure 4 8 9 DSCP Mapping Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Des cription e DSCP Display the current CoS value e Mapping to Queue Display the current mapping to queue e Queue Display the current queue value e Mapping to DSCP Display the current mapping to DSCP 213 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 8 2 6 IP Precedence Mapping The IP Precedence to Queue and Queue to IP Precedence Mapping screens in Figure 4 8 10 amp Figure 4 8 11 appear IP Precedence to Queue Mapping Queue to IP Precedence Mapping 0 gie mi Apply Figure 4 8 10 IP Precedence to Queue and Queue to IP Precedence Mapping Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Queue Select Queue value from this drop down list e IP Precedence Select IP Precedence value from this drop down list Buttons Apply L_ Apply Click to apply changes 214 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST IP Precedence Mapping Figure 4 8 11 IP Precedence Mapping Page Screenshot
45. Maximum 30 The maximum age of the information transmitted by the Bridge when it is the Root Bridge Valid values are in the range 6 to 40 seconds Default 20 Minimum The higher of 6 or 2 x Hello Time 1 Maximum The lower of 40 or 2 x Forward Delay 1 The number of BPDU s a bridge port can send per second When exceeded transmission of the next BPDU will be delayed Valid values are in the range 1 to 10 BPDU s per second The time that controls the switch to send out the BPDU packet to check STP current status Enter a value between 1 through 10 CIST Instance Information Forward Delay Tx Hold Count Figure 4 6 9 CIST Instance Information Page Screenshot 164 PLANET Networking amp Communication The page includes the following fields Object 4 6 5 CIST Port Setting Priority Max Hop Forward Delay Max Age Tx Hold Count Hello Time User s Manual of LRP 422CST Description Display the current CIST priority Display the current max hop Display the current forward delay Display the current max age Display the current Tx hold count Display the current hello time This page allows you to configure per port CIST priority and cost The CIST Port Setting and Status screens in Figure 4 6 10 amp Figure 4 6 11 appear The page includes the following fields Object e Internal Path Cost Port Select Priority 0 Auto Port Select Priority CIST Port Setting
46. Method 3 Method 4 ae ae EC Add Figure 4 9 17 New Authentication List Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e List Name Defines a name for the authentication list e Method 1 4 Set the login authentication method Empty None Local TACACS RADIUS Enable Buttons Add l o Click to add authentication list Login Authentication Lists List Name Method List Modify Figure 4 9 18 Login Authentication List Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e List Name Display the current list name e Method List Display the current method list e Modify Click Edit to edit login authentication list parameter Click Delete to delete login authentication list entry 245 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 9 4 2 Enable List This page is to login list parameters The authentication list screens in Figure 4 9 19 amp Figure 4 9 20 appear New Authentication List List Name Method 1 Method 2 Method 3 Beets Bet E Add Figure 4 9 19 New Authentication List Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e List Name Defines a name for the authentication list e Method 1 3 Set the login authentication method Empty None Enable TACACS RADIUS Buttons Add i ee at Click to add authentication list Enable Authentication List New Authentication L
47. Methods 45 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 3 3 Administration Console The administration console is an internal character oriented and command line user interface for performing system administration such as displaying statistics or changing option settings Using this method you can view the administration console from a terminal personal computer Apple Macintosh or workstation connected to the LRP Managed Switch s console port PC Workstation with Terminal Emulation Software Managed Switch RS 232 to RJ 45 Cable Serial Port Figure 3 1 1 Console Management Direct Access Direct access to the administration console is achieved by directly connecting a terminal or a PC equipped with a terminal emulation program such as HyperTerminal to the LRP Managed Switch console serial port When using this management method a straight RS232 to RJ45 cable is required to connect the switch to the PC After making this connection configure the terminal emulation program to use the following parameters The default parameters are mM 115200 bps COM Properties CG D 8 data bits Port Settings E No parity E 1 stop bit Bits per second Je Data bits Parity Stop bits Flow control Figure 3 1 2 Terminal Parameter Settings 46 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST You can change these settings if desired aft
48. Status screens in Figure 4 7 15 amp Figure 4 7 16 appear IGMP Router Port Setting Add Router Port VLAN ID Static Ports Select Forbid Ports Select Select VLANs Static Forbid Select Static Ports Add Figure 4 7 15 Add Router Port Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID Selects the VLAN to propagate all multicast traffic coming from the attached multicast router e Type Sets the Router port type The types of Router port as below E Static E Forbid e Static Ports Select Specify which ports act as router ports A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or IGMP querier e Forbid Port Select Specify which ports un act as router ports Buttons Add Click to add IGMP router port entry 183 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST Figure 4 7 16 Router Port Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID Display the current VLAN ID e Static Ports Display the current static ports e Forbidden Ports Display the current forbidden ports e Modify Edit Click to edit parameter Click Delete to delete the group ID entry 4 7 2 6 IGMP Router Table This page provides Router Table The Dynamic Static and Forbidden Router Table screens in Figure 4 7 17 Figure 4 7 18 amp Figure 4 7 19 appear IGMP Router Table
49. The range is from 15 to 86400 seconds The default is 300 seconds 5 minutes Specify when to stop the database transfer process after the binding database changes The range is from 0 to 86400 Use 0 for an infinite duration The default is 300 seconds 5 minutes DHCP Snooping Database Informations Information Name Information Value File Name Remote Server Write Delay Timeout Figure 4 9 43 DHCP Snooping Database Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e Database Type e File Name e Remote Server e Write Delay e Timeout Description Display the current database type Display the current file name Display the current remote server Display the current write delay Display the current timeout 266 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 9 7 7 Rate Limit After enabling DHCP snooping the switch will monitor all the DHCP messages and implement software transmission The DHCP Rate Limit Setting and Config screens in Figure 4 9 44 amp Figure 4 9 45 appear DHCP Rate Limit DHCP Rate Limit Setting Select Ports Default User Deftine Unlimited 1 300 pps Apply Figure 4 9 44 DHCP Rate Limit Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select port from this drop down list e State Set default or user define e Rate Limit pps Configure the rate limit fo
50. This page is used to configure the LACP port setting The LACP Port Setting screens in Figure 4 4 10 amp Figure 4 4 11 appear LACP Port Settings Ss d S Ra Sie Cl S H Wm J Li 3 8 La r Lo Rene ER 3 ait CO t Wes Ap ri KA WI Sai aa Apply Figure 4 4 10 LACP Port Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select Select port number from this drop down list to set LACP port setting e Priority The Priority controls the priority of the port If the LACP partner wants to form a larger group than is supported by this device then this parameter will control which ports will be active and which ports will be in a backup role Lower number means greater priority e Timeout The Timeout controls the period between BPDU transmissions Short will transmit LACP packets each second while Long will wait for 30 seconds before sending an LACP packet Buttons Apply Click to apply changes LACP Port Information are na en Figure 4 4 11 LACP Port Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields 118 PLANET Networking amp Communication Object e Port Name e Priority e Timeout 4 4 6 LAG Status User s Manual of LRP 422CST Description The switch port number of the logical port Display the current LACP priority parameter Display the current timeout parameter This page displays LAG status The LAG Status scre
51. Un Trusted O Trusted Enable Disable Apply Figure 4 9 39 DHCP Snooping Port Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select port from this drop down list e Type Indicates the DHCP snooping port mode Possible port modes are m Trusted Configures the port as trusted sources of the DHCP message m Untrusted Configures the port as untrusted sources of the DHCP message e Chaddr Check Indicates that the Chaddr check function is enabled on selected port Chaddr Client hardware address Buttons Appl PPY Click to apply changes 262 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST DHCP Snooping Port Setting Chaddr Check Figure 4 9 40 DHCP Snooping Port Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Type Display the current type e Chaddr Check Display the current chaddr check 263 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 9 7 5 Statistics The DHCP Snooping Statistics screen in Figure 4 9 41 appears DHCP Snooping Statistics DHCP Snooping Statistics Clear Refresh Untrust EJ Figure 4 9 41 DHCP Snooping Statistics Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Forwarded Display the current forwa
52. Untagged GES Hybrid O Forbidden Excluded Tagged O Untagged Beem 148 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 5 14 2 VLAN Trunking between Two 802 1Q Aware Switches In most cases they are used for Uplink to other switches VLANs are separated at different switches but they need to access other switches within the same VLAN group The screen in Figure 4 5 21 appears d 8 8 WE E 8 8 98 WE WE 8 WR 8 8 WE ee 8 PC 2 PC 3 Untagged Tagged gE O ee ee 9 8 8 We PC 5 PC 6 Untagged Tagged Lem em sm em em pm em em en em Li ha Em Rp em tm mk iz I 802 1Q VLAN 2 Trunking i i VLAN 3 PC 4 Untagged Dm mem em em em em mm mm sm mm Im mm em em mm mm mm em mm em e SS J B I PC 1 i Untagged i D D e em pm pm em em em em e em sm mm sm em em mm e em mm e em sm em em em ma ee E eee ee eee Setup steps Add VLAN group 2 and group 3 VL AN PR I D Im VLE AN 1 Th ai a e 149 PLANET i iain User s Manual of LRP 422CST Port 1 Port 2 and Port 3 VLAN Mode Hybrid PVID 2 Port 4 Port 5 and Port 6 VLAN Mode Hybrid PVID 3 Port 7 VLAN Mode Hybrid PVID 1 Port VLAN Status ce aes po o es Jo ooo p Iw a VLAN ID 1 Port 1 6 Untagged Port 7 Excluded Port to VLAN Settings VLAN ID Hybrid O Forbidden Excluded Tagged Untagged Hybrid Forbidden Excluded Ta
53. User s Manual of LRP 422CST Display the current query robustness Display the current query interval Display the current query max response interval Display the current last member query count Display the current last member query interval Display the current immediate leave Click Edit to edit parameter The MLD Static Group configuration screens in Figure 4 7 24 amp Figure 4 7 25 appear Add Mild Static Group VLAN ID Group IP Address Member Ports Select VLANs Add The page includes the following fields Buttons Add Figure 4 7 24 Add MLD Static Group Page Screenshot Object e VLAN ID e Group IP Address e Member Ports Description Select VLAN ID from this drop down list The IP address for a specific multicast service Select port number from this drop down list Click to add IGMP router port entry 191 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST MLD Static Groups VLAN ID Group IPv6 Address Modify Figure 4 7 25 MLD Static Groups Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID Display the current VLAN ID Group IPv6 Address Display the current group IPv6 address e Member Ports Display the current member ports e Modify Edit Click to edit parameter 4 7 4 3 MLD Group Table This page provides MLD Group Table The MLD Group Table screen in Figure 4 7 26 appears MLD Group Table
54. User s Manual of LRP 422CST The total number of packets including bad packets broadcast packets and multicast packets received The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address The total number of packets received that had a length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets of between 64 and 1518 octets The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets The number of frames which size is less than 64 octets received with invalid CRC The number of frames which size is larger than 64 octets received with invalid CRC The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment The total number of packets including bad packets received that were 64 octets in length The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 65 to 127 octets in length The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 128 to 255 octets in length The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 256 to 511 octets in length The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 512 to 1023 octets in length The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 1024 to 1518 octets in length C
55. VLAN Port Setting Page Screenshot Object e Port e State e CoS Mode Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Description Select port number for this drop down list Enable or disable the voice VLAN port setting The default value is Disabled Select the current CoS mode 226 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST Voice VLAN Port State em A State CoS Mode Fort Figure 4 8 27 Voice VLAN Port State Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e State Display the current state e CoS Mode Display the current CoS mode 227 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 9 Security This section is to control the access of the LRP Managed Switch including the user access and management control The Security page contains links to the following main topics CO 802 1X a DHCP Snooping E RADIUS Server E Dynamic ARP Inspection E TACACS Server E IP Source Guard S AAA a Port Security H Access a DoS S Management Access Method E Storm Control 4 9 1 802 1X Overview of 802 1X Port based Authentication In the 802 1X world the user is called the supplicant the switch is the authenticator and the RADIUS server is the authentication server The switch acts as the man in the middle forwarding requests and responses between the supplicant and the auth
56. Voice VLAN ID It should be a unique VLAN ID in the system and cannot equal each port PVID It is conflict configuration if the value equal management VID MVR VID PVID etc The allowed range is 1 to 4095 Select 802 1p value from this drop down list Enable or disable 802 1p remark The time after which a port is removed from the Voice VLAN when VolP traffic is no longer received on the port Default 1440 minutes 223 PLANET Networking amp Communication Buttons Apply User s Manual of LRP 422CST Click to apply changes Voice VLAN State Information Name Information Value Voice VLAN State disabled Remark Cos 802 1p EN Tp Remark State Aging Figure 4 8 23 Properties Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Voice VLAN State Display the current voice VLAN state e Voice VLAN ID Display the current voice VLAN ID e Remark CoS 802 1p Display the current remark CoS 802 1p e 1p Remark Display the current 1p remark e Aging Display the current aging time 224 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 8 5 3 Telephony OUI MAC Setting Configure VOICE VLAN OUI table on this Page The Telephony OUI MAC Setting screens in Figure 4 8 24 amp Figure 4 8 25 appear Telephony OUI MAC Setting Voice VLAN OUI Setting OUI Address 00 00 00 Toe et oe Lesti ILIC a Add Figure 4 8 24 Voice VLAN OUI Settings
57. are Profile Profile2 Profile3 Profile4 Allows user to set week day for defining PoE function by enabling it on the day Allows user to set what hour PoE function does by enabling it Allows user to set what minute PoE function does by enabling it Allows user to set what hour PoE function does by disabling it Allows user to set what minute PoE function does by disabling it Allows user to enable or disable the whole PoE port reboot by PoE reboot schedule Please note that if you want PoE schedule and PoE reboot schedule to work at the same time please use this function and don t use Reboot Only function This function offers administrator to reboot PoE device at an indicated time if administrator has this kind of requirement Allows user to reboot PoE function by PoE reboot schedule Please note that if administrator enables this function POE schedule will not set time to profile This function is just for PoE port to reset at an indicated time Allows user to set what hour PoE reboots This function is only for PoE reboot schedule Allows user to set what minute PoE reboots This function is only for PoE reboot schedule Click to add new rule _Apply J Click to apply changes Delete Check to delete the entry 356 PLANET PESCHE User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 15 5 PoE Alive Check Configuration The PoE Switch can be configured to monitor connected PD s status in real time via ping action Once the PD
58. authentication list from this drop down list Set the session timeout value Set the password retry count value Set the silent time value Click to disconnect Telnet communication 249 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST Telnet Information Information Name Information Value Login Authentication List Default Enable Authentication List Default Password Retry Count Current Telnet Sessions Count Figure 4 9 24 Telnet Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Telnet Service Display the current Telnet service e Login Authentication List Display the current login authentication list e Enable Authentication List Display the current enable authentication list e Session Timeout Display the current session timeout e Password Retry Count Display the current password retry count e Silent Time Display the current silent time e Current Telnet Session Display the current Telnet session count Count 250 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 9 5 3 SSH Configure SSH on this page This page shows the Port Security status Port Security is a module with no direct configuration Configuration comes indirectly from other modules the user modules When a user module has enabled port security on a port the port is set up for software based learning In this mode frames from unknown MAC addresse
59. budget automatically e PoE Temperature Display the PoE Chip Temperature This section displays the PoE Power Usage of Current Power Consumption as Figure 4 16 2 shows 352 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST Figure 4 16 2 Current Power Consumption Screenshot This section allows the user to inspect and configure the current PoE port settings as Figure 4 16 3 shows Current Power Power PoE Mode ene rer oe Used wm Allocation EE ES Profile 1 Critical e er ce frome Ee ce reer Figure 4 16 3 Power over Ethernet Configuration Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e PoE Mode There are three modes for PoE mode E Enable enable PoE function E Disable disable PoE function WR Schedule enable PoE function in schedule mode e Schedule Indicates the scheduled profile mode Possible profiles are WM Profile1 WM Profile2 E Profile3 E Profile4 e Priority The Priority represents PoE ports priority There are three levels of power priority named Low High and Critical The priority is used in case the total power consumption is over the total power budget In this case the port with the lowest priority will be turned off and offer power for the port of higher priority e Current Used mA The Power Used shows how much current the PD currently is using 353 PLANET d Ke _ re User s Manual of LRP 422CST e Power Used W The P
60. buffered up until a large burst of traffic can be transmitted Buffering traffic will give some latency in the traffic The EEE Port Settings screens in Figure 4 3 18 amp Figure 4 3 19 appear EEE Port Settings Apply Figure 4 3 18 EEE Port Settings Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select port number from this drop down list e Enable Enable or disable the EEE function Buttons Apply Click to apply changes 107 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST EEE Enable Status Figure 4 3 19 EEE Enable Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e EEE State Display the current EEE state EEE is available for GE1 GE2 only 4 3 11 SFP Module Information LRP Managed Switch has supported the SFP module with digital diagnostics monitoring DDM function this feature is also known as digital optical monitoring DOM You can check the physical or operational status of an SFP module via the SFP Module Information Page This Page shows the operational status such as the transceiver type speed wavelength optical output power optical input power temperature laser bias current and transceiver supply voltage in real time You can also use the hyperlink of port no to check the statistics on a specific interface 4 3 11 1 SFP Module Status T
61. by the interface Interface is a member of the MLD 196 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST Buttons Appl HE Click to apply changes 4 7 5 MLD Snooping Statics This page provides MLD Snooping Statics The MLD Snooping Statics screen in Figure 4 7 33 appears MLD Snooping Statistics MLD Snooping Statistics Clear Refresh statistics Packets Counter Total Ha Valid Rix Invalid He Other Ha Leave Ha Report Ra General uey RX id Special Gavp Query AX K Special Group amp Source ouer ax fo Lost KE Repent KE EES Special Gavp Overy eid Special Group amp soree uey fo Figure 4 7 33 Forward All Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Total RX Display the current total RX 197 PLANET lt Networking amp Communication Buttons lear Refresh Valid RX Invalid RX Other RX Leave RX Report RX General Query RX Special Group Query RX Special Group amp Source Query RX Leave TX Report TX General Query TX Special Group Query TX Special Group amp Source Query TX User s Manual of LRP 422CST Display the current valid RX Display the current invalid RX Display the current other RX Display the current leave RX Display the current report RX Display the current general query RX Display the current special group query RX Display the current special group amp source q
62. control E Unknown Multicast storm rate control The configuration indicates the permitted packet rate for unknown unicast unknown multicast or broadcast traffic across the switch The Storm Control Configuration screens in Figure 4 9 73 amp Figure 4 9 74 appear storm Control Setting Cowen Disable Select Ports drop I CJUnknown Multicast Enable Cd Unknown Unicast Apply Figure 4 9 73 Storm Control Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select port for this drop down list e Port State Enable or disable the storm control status for the given storm type e Action Configures the action performed when storm control is over rate on a port Valid values are Shutdown or Drop e Type Enable The settings in a particular row apply to the frame type listed here E broadcast WR unknown unicast WR unknown multicast Rate kbps pps Configure the rate for the storm control The default value is 10 000 291 PLANET Networking amp Communication Buttons Apply User s Manual of LRP 422CST Click to apply changes Storm Control Information ke 1 Hot Unknown Unica Fa Le q Ab Jah a a WCS SE of 10000 of 10000 of 10000 FED of 10000 of 10000 of 10000 FE3 of 10000 of 10000 FEA of 10000 of 10000 SE of 10000 of 10000 GEZ Off 10000 Off 10000 Figure 4 9 74 Storm Contr
63. e dd C dO Fagnens Od ERR ERR Spee KE CE Ce dO CE dd EES E Figure 4 3 6 RMON Counters Page Screenshot Object Description e Drop Events The total number of events in which packets were dropped due to lack of resources e Octets The total number of octets received and transmitted on the interface including framing characters e Packets The total number of packets received and transmitted on the interface e Broadcast Packets The total number of good frames received that were directed to the broadcast address Note that this does not include multicast packets e Multicast Packets The total number of good frames received that were directed to this multicast address e CRC Alignment The number of CRC alignment errors FCS or alignment errors Errors e Undersize Packets The total number of frames received that were less than 64 octets long excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and were otherwise well formed e Oversize Packets The total number of frames received that were longer than 1518 octets 95 PLANET Networking amp Communication e Fragments e Jabbers e Collisions e 64 Bytes Frames e 65 127 Byte Frames 128 255 Byte Frames 256 511 Byte Frames 512 1023 Byte Frames 1024 1518 Byte Frames User s Manual of LRP 422CST excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and were otherwise well formed The total number of frames received that were less than 64 octets in le
64. each Spanning Tree The STP Global Settings screens in Figure 4 6 4 amp Figure 4 6 5 appear 158 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST STP Global Setting Global Setting Enable Disable BPDU Forward Flooding Filtering PathCost Method Short Long Configuration Name OU 30 4F 14 00 01 Max 24 Charactor Configuration Revision 0 D 65535 Apply Figure 4 6 4 Global Settings Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Enable Enable or disable the STP function The default value is Disabled e BPDU Forward Set the BPDU forward method e PathCost Method The path cost method is used to determine the best path between devices Therefore lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media and higher values assigned to ports with slower media e Force Version The STP protocol version setting Valid values are STP Compatible RSTP Operation and MSTP Operation e Configuration Name Identifier used to identify the configuration currently being used e Configuration Revision Identifier used to identify the configuration currently being used The values allowed are between 0 and 65535 The default value is 0 Buttons Appl HEH Click to apply changes 159 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST STP Informations Information Name Information Value l F i
65. enables the administrator to monitor the status of the power usage of the connected PDs in real time Thus it greatly enhances the management efficiency of the facilities IPv6 IPv4 Dual Stack Supporting both IPv6 and IPv4 protocols the LRP 422CST helps the SMBs to step in the IPv6 era with the lowest investment as its network facilities need not be replaced or overhauled if the IPv6 FT Tx edge network is set up 14 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST Robust Layer 2 Features The LRP 422CST can be programmed for advanced switch management functions such as dynamic port link aggregation 802 1Q VLAN and Q in Q VLAN Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP Loop and BPDU Guard IGMP Snooping and MLD Snooping Via the link aggregation the LRP 422CST allows the operation of a high speed trunk to combine with multiple ports such as an 8Gbps fat pipe and supports fail over as well Also the Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP is the Layer 2 Protocol included to help discover basic information about neighboring devices on the local broadcast domain L2 L4 Managed Switch Managed Switch L2 L4 Efficient Traffic Control The LRP 422CST is loaded with robust QoS features and powerful traffic management to enhance services to business class data voice and video solutions The functionality includes broadcast multicast storm control per port bandwidth control IP DSCP QoS priority and remarking
66. ght Add Figure 4 2 23 Community Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Community Name Indicates the community read write access string to permit access to SNMP agent The allowed string length is O to 16 e Community Mode Indicates the SNMP community supported mode Possible versions are E Basic Set SNMP community mode supported version 1 and 2c E Advanced Set SNMP community mode supported version 3 e Group Name A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 16 e View Name A string identifying the view name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 16 e Access Right Indicates the SNMP community type operation Possible types are RO Read Only Set access string type in read only mode RW Read Write Set access string type in read write mode Buttons Apply Click to apply changes em O eo e EC Figure 4 2 24 Community Status Page Screenshot 76 PLANET Networking amp Communication The page includes the following fields Object e Community Name e Group Name e View Name e Access Right e Delete 4 2 7 4 SNMP View User s Manual of LRP 422CST Description Display the current community type Display the current SNMP access group s name Display the current view name Display the current access type Ze Delete the community entry Configure SNMPv3 view
67. in Authorized and Unauthorized States The switch port state determines whether or not the client is granted access to the network The port starts in the unauthorized state While in this state the port disallows all ingress and egress traffic except for 802 1X protocol packets When a client is successfully authenticated the port transitions to the authorized state allowing all traffic for the client to flow normally If a client that does not support 802 1X is connected to an unauthorized 802 1X port the switch requests the client s identity In this situation the client does not respond to the request the port remains in the unauthorized state and the client is not granted access to the network In contrast when an 802 1X enabled client connects to a port that is not running the 802 1X protocol the client initiates the authentication process by sending the EAPOL start frame When no response is received the client sends the request for a fixed number of times Because no response is received the client begins sending frames as if the port is in the authorized state If the client is successfully authenticated receives an Accept frame from the authentication server the port state changes to authorized and all frames from the authenticated client are allowed through the port If the authentication fails the port remains in the unauthorized state but authentication can be retried If the authentication server cannot be reached the swi
68. input power e Transmit Fault Display the current SFP transmit fault e Loss of Signal Display the current SFP loss of signal e Rate Ready Display the current SFP rate ready 110 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 4 Link Aggregation Port Aggregation optimizes port usage by linking a group of ports together to form a single Link Aggregated Groups LAGs Port Aggregation multiplies the bandwidth between the devices increases port flexibility and provides link redundancy Each LAG is composed of ports of the same speed set to full duplex operations Ports in a LAG can be of different media types UTP Fiber or different fiber types provided they operate at the same speed Aggregated Links can be assigned manually Port Trunk or automatically by enabling Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP on the relevant links Aggregated Links are treated by the system as a single logical port Specifically the Aggregated Link has similar port attributes to a non aggregated port including auto negotiation speed suplex setting etc The device supports the following Aggregation links a Static LAGs Port Trunk Force aggregated selected ports to be a trunk group a Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP LAGs LACP LAG negotiate Aggregated Port links with other LACP ports located on a different device If the other device ports are also LACP ports the devices establish a LAG a L
69. multi single mode 1000BASE SX LX 50 125um or 62 5 125um multi mode 9 125um single mode LC multi single mode Any Ethernet devices like hubs and PCs can connect to the LRP Managed Switch by using straight through wires The two 10 100 1000Mbps ports are auto MDI MDI X and can be used on straight through or crossover cable 35 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 2 2 5 Installing the SFP transceiver The sections describe how to insert an SFP transceiver into an SFP slot The SFP transceivers are hot pluggable and hot swappable You can plug in and out the transceiver to from any SFP port without having to power down the LRP Managed Switch as Figure 2 1 shows Follow all the installation and removal of SFP transceiver steps as shown in the example TE SM D pu Ring RO 2 MGB MFB Series Transceiver Figure 2 1 Plug in the SFP transceiver E Approved PLANET SFP Transceivers PLANET LRP Managed Switch supports both single mode and multi mode SFP transceivers The following list of approved PLANET SFP transceivers is correct at the time of publication Fast Ethernet Transceiver 100BASE X SFP Syel 1 10 idee eet Fiber Mode Distance Wavelength nm Operating Temp 36 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST Fast Ethernet Transceiver 100BASE BX Single Fiber Bi directional SFP Connector Fiber Mode Distance Wavelength Wav
70. multicast traffic coming from the attached multicast router e Type Sets the Router port type The types of Router port as below Static Forbid e Static Ports Select Specify which ports act as router ports A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or MLD querier e Forbid Port Select Specify which ports un act as router ports Buttons Add Click to add MLD router port entry 193 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST MLD Router Ports Status VLAN ID Forbidden Ports Modify Figure 4 7 28 Router Port Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID Display the current VLAN ID e Static Ports Display the current static ports e Forbidden Ports Display the current forbidden ports e Modify Edit Click to edit parameter Click Delete to delete the group ID entry 4 7 4 5 MLD Router Table This page provides Router Table The Dynamic Static and Forbidden Router Table screens in Figure 4 7 29 Figure 4 7 30 amp Figure 4 7 31 appear MLD Router Table Dynamic Router Table VLAN ID Port Expiry Time Sec Figure 4 7 29 Dynamic Router Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields 194 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST Object Description e VLAN ID Display the current VLAN ID e Port Display the current dy
71. of LRP 422CST e TCP Min Header Length Display the current TCP min header length e TCP SYN SPORT lt 1024 Display the current TCP syn status e Null Scan Attack Display the current null scan attack status e X mas Scan Attack Display the current X mas scan attack status e TCP SYN FIN Attack Display the current TCP syn fin attack status e TCP SYN RST Attack Display the current TCP syn rst attack status e TCP Fragment Offset 1 Display the TCP fragment offset 1 status 4 9 11 2 DoS Port Setting The DoS Port Setting and Status screens in Figure 4 9 69 amp Figure 4 9 70 appear STF Port Setting Port Select Dos Protection Select Ports Enabled Disabled Apply Figure 4 9 69 Port Security Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select Select port from this drop down list e DoS Protection Enable or disable per port DoS protection Buttons Apply Click to apply changes 288 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST DoS Port Status DoS Protection Figure 4 9 70 Port Security Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e DoS Protection Display the current DoS protection 289 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 9 12 Storm Control Storm control for the switch is configur
72. of service service for voice data and improve voice data traffic transmission priority to ensure the calling quality The switch can judge if the data traffic is the voice data traffic from specified equipment according to the source MAC address field of the data packet entering the port The packet with the source MAC address complying with the system defined voice equipment OUI Organizationally Unique Identifier will be considered the voice data traffic and transmitted to the Voice VLAN The configuration is based on MAC address acquiring a mechanism in which every voice equipment transmitting information through the network has got its unique MAC address VLAN will trace the address belongs to specified MAC By This means VLAN allows the voice equipment always belong to Voice VLAN when relocated physically The greatest advantage of the VLAN is the equipment can be automatically placed into Voice VLAN according to its voice traffic which will be transmitted at specified priority Meanwhile when voice equipment is physically relocated it still belongs to the Voice VLAN without any further configuration modification which is because it is based on voice equipment other than switch port The Voice VLAN feature enables the voice traffic to forward on the Voice VLAN and then the switch can be classified and scheduled to network traffic It is recommended there are two VLANs on a port one for voice one for data a Before connecting t
73. one side being the male duplex LC connector type Connect the Fiber Cable 1 Insert the duplex LC connector into the SFP transceiver 2 Connect the other end of the cable to a device with SFP transceiver installed 3 Check the LNK ACT LED of the SFP slot on the front of the LRP Managed Switch Ensure that the SFP transceiver is operating correctly 4 Check the Link mode of the SFP port if the link fails To function with some fiber NICs or media converters user has to set the port Link mode to 1000 Force or 100 Force E Remove the Transceiver Module 1 Make sure there is no network activity anymore 2 Remove the fiber optic cable gently d Lift up the lever of the MGB module and turn it to a horizontal position 4 Pull out the module gently through the lever 38 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST gee EN Ee 3 PLANET WU a MGB MFB Series Transceiver T IgGs 20040 47 Figure 2 2 How to Pull Out the SFP Transceiver Never pull out the module without lifting up the lever of the module and turning it into a horizontal position Directly pulling out the module could damage the module and the SFP module slot of the LRP Managed Switch 39 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 2 2 6 Installing the Long Reach PoE Communication The sections describe how to insert a coaxial cable into a BNC female port Y
74. packet is received all DHCP packets are forwarded for a trusted port If the received packet is a DHCP ACK message a dynamic DHCP snooping entry is also added to the binding table a lf DHCP snooping is enabled globally and also enabled on the VLAN where the DHCP packet is received but the port is not trusted it is processed as follows gt If the DHCP packet is a reply packet from a DHCP server including OFFER ACK or NAK messages the packet is dropped gt If the DHCP packet is from a client such as a DECLINE or RELEASE message the switch forwards the packet only if the corresponding entry is found in the binding table gt If the DHCP packet is from a client such as a DISCOVER REQUEST INFORM DECLINE or RELEASE message the packet is forwarded if MAC address verification is disabled However if MAC address verification is enabled then the packet will only be forwarded if the client s hardware address stored in the DHCP packet is the same as the source MAC address in the Ethernet header gt If the DHCP packet is not a recognizable type it is dropped e f a DHCP packet from a client passes the filtering criteria above it will only be forwarded to trusted ports in the same VLAN e If a DHCP packet is from server is received on a trusted port it will be forwarded to both trusted and untrusted ports in the same VLAN e Ifthe DHCP snooping is globally disabled all dynamic bindings are removed from the binding table m Add
75. port PD is specified in the Maximum Power fields The ports are shut down when total reserved power exceeds the amount of power that the power supply can deliver 351 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST In this mode the port power is not turned on if the PD requests more available power 4 15 3 Power over Ethernet Configuration This section allows the user to inspect and configure the current PoE configuration setting as screen in Figure 4 16 1 appears PoE Configuration PoE Configuration System PoE Admin Mode Disable PoE Management Mode Consumption Temperature Threshold Ep Degrees C PoE Temperature 2 r 1 20 F Power Budget 150 Y Figure 4 16 1 PoE Configuration Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e System PoE Admin Allows user to enable or disable PoE function It will cause all of PoE ports to Mode supply or not to supply power e PoE Management There are six modes for configuring how the ports PDs may reserve power and Mode when to shut down ports E Consumption mode The system offers PoE power according to PD real power consumption E Allocation mode Users allow to assign how much PoE power to each port and the system will reserve PoE power to PD e Temperature Allows setting over temperature protection threshold value If the system Threshold temperature is overly high the system will lower the total POE power
76. result in topology changes where a port that transitioned directly from a Blocking state to a Forwarding state could create temporary data loops Ports must wait for new network topology information to propagate throughout the network before starting to forward packets They must also wait for the packet lifetime to expire for BPDU packets that were forwarded based on the old topology The forward delay timer is used to allow the network topology to stabilize after a topology change In addition STP specifies a series of states a port must transition through to further ensure that a stable network topology is created after a topology change Each port on a switch using STP exists is in one of the following five states a Blocking the port is blocked from forwarding or receiving packets Listening the port is waiting to receive BPDU packets that may tell the port to go back to the blocking state Learning the port is adding addresses to its forwarding database but not yet forwarding packets Forwarding the port is forwarding packets Disabled the port only responds to network management messages and must return to the blocking state first A port transitions from one state to another as follows From initialization Switch boot to blocking From blocking to listening or to disabled From listening to learning or to disabled From learning to forwarding or to disabled From forwarding to disabled 153 PLANET Networking
77. source IP address filter you can enter a specific source IP address The legal format is xxx xxx xxx xxx A frame that hits this ACE matches this source IP address value When User Defined is selected for the source IP filter you can enter a specific SIP mask in dotted decimal notation Specify the Destination IP address filter for this ACE E Any No destination IP address filter is specified WR User Defined If you want to filter a specific destination IP address with this ACE choose this value A field for entering a source IP address value appears When User Defined is selected for the destination IP address filter you can enter a specific destination IP address The legal format is xxx xxx xxx xxx A frame that hits this ACE matches this destination IP address value When User Defined is selected for the destination IP filter you can enter a specific DIP mask in dotted decimal notation Specify the source port for this ACE E Any No specific source port is specified source port status is don t care WR Single If you want to filter a specific source port with this ACE you can enter a specific source port value A field for entering a source port value appears The allowed range is 0 to 65535 A frame that hits this ACE matches this source port value 299 e PLANET Networking amp Communication e Destination Port e TCP Flags User s Manual of LRP 422CST Range If you want to filter a spec
78. t care DSCP If you want to filter a specific DSCP with this ACE you can enter a specific DSCP value A field for entering a DSCP value appears The allowed range is 0 to 63 Aframe that hits this ACE matches this DSCP value IP Precedence If you want to filter a specific IP precedence with this ACE you can enter a specific IP precedence value A field for entering an IP precedence value appears The allowed range is 0 to 7 A frame that hits this ACE matches this IP precedence value Specify the ICMP for this ACE Any No specific ICMP is specified destination port status is don t care List If you want to filter a specific list with this ACE you can select a specific list value Protocol ID If you want to filter a specific protocol ID filter with this ACE you can enter a specific protocol ID value A field for entering a protocol ID value appears The allowed range is 0 to 255 A frame that hits this ACE matches this protocol ID value Specify the ICMP code filter for this ACE E Any No ICMP code filter is specified ICMP code filter status is don t care WR User Defined If you want to filter a specific ICMP code filter with this ACE you can enter a specific ICMP code value A field for entering an ICMP code value appears The allowed range is 0 to 255 A frame that hits this ACE matches this ICMP code value 301 PLANET Networking amp Communication IPv4 Based ACE Table User s Manual of LRP
79. table on this page The entry index keys are View Name and OID Subtree The SNMPv3 View Table Setting screens in Figure 4 2 25 and Figure 4 2 26 appear View Table Setting View Name C subtree 01D subtree op Mask a ee Add Figure 4 2 25 SNMPv3 View Table Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e View Name e Subtree OID e Subtree OID Mask e View Type Description A string identifying the view name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 16 The OID defining the root of the subtree to add to the named view The allowed string content is digital number or asterisk The bitmask identifies which positions in the specified object identifier are to be regarded as wildcards for the purpose of pattern matching Indicates the view type that this entry should belong to Possible view type are included An optional flag to indicate that this view subtree should be included excluded An optional flag to indicate that this view subtree should be excluded General if a view entry s view type is excluded it should exist another view entry in which view type is included and its OID subtree oversteps the excluded view entry I PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST Buttons Add Click to add a new view entry View Table Status Subtree OID OID Mask View Type Figure 4 2 23 SN
80. the Switch spends in the listening state while moving from the blocking state to the forwarding state Observe the following formulas when setting the above parameters Max Age _ 2 x Forward Delay 1 second Max Age _ 2 x Hello Time 1 second Port Priority A Port Priority can be from 0 to 240 The lower the number the greater the probability the port will be chosen as the Root Port Port Cost A Port Cost can be set from 0 to 200000000 The lower the number the greater the probability the port will be chosen to forward packets 3 Illustration of STP A simple illustration of three switches connected in a loop is depicted in the below diagram In this example you can anticipate some major network problems if the STP assistance is not applied If switch A broadcasts a packet to switch B switch B will broadcast it to switch C and switch C will broadcast it to back to switch A and so on The broadcast packet will be passed indefinitely in a loop potentially causing a network failure In this example STP breaks the loop by blocking the connection between switch B and C The decision to block a particular connection is based on the STP calculation of the most current Bridge and Port settings Now if switch A broadcasts a packet to switch C then switch C will drop the packet at port 2 and the broadcast will end there Setting up STP using values other than the defaults can be complex Therefore you are advised to
81. the client The switch includes the RADIUS client which is responsible for encapsulating and decapsulating the Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP frames and interacting with the authentication server When the switch receives EAPOL frames and relays them to the authentication server the Ethernet header is stripped and the remaining EAP frame is re encapsulated in the RADIUS format The EAP frames are not modified or examined during encapsulation and the authentication server must support EAP within the native frame format When the switch receives frames from the authentication server the server s frame header is removed leaving the EAP frame which is then encapsulated for Ethernet and sent to the client a Authentication Initiation and Message Exchange The switch or the client can initiate authentication If you enable authentication on a port by using the dot1x port control auto interface configuration command the switch must initiate authentication when it determines that the port link state transitions from down to up It then sends an EAP request identity frame to the client to request its identity typically the switch sends an initial identity request frame followed by one or more requests for authentication information Upon receipt of the frame the client responds with an EAP response identity frame However if during bootup the client does not receive an EAP request identity frame from the switch the client can initiate
82. to PLANET LRP 422CST Industrial 4 Port Coax Long Reach PoE 2 Port 10 100 1000T 2 Port 100 1000X SFP Managed Switch PLANET Technology Corporation 10F No 96 Minquan Rd Xindian Dist New Taipei City 231 Taiwan R O C Tel 886 2 2219 9518 Fax 886 2 2219 9528 Email support planet com tw Copyright 2015 PLANET Technology Corporation All rights reserved Figure 3 1 4 Web Main Screen of LRP Managed Switch 47 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 3 5 SNMP based Network Management You can use an external SNMP based application to configure and manage the LRP Managed Switch such as SNMP Network Manager HP Openview Network Node Management NNM or What s Up Gold This management method requires the SNMP agent on the switch and the SNMP Network Management Station to use the same community string This management method in fact uses two community strings the get community string and the set community string If the SNMP Net work management Station only knows the set community string it can read and write to the MIBs However if it only knows the get community string it can only read MIBs The default gets and sets community strings for the LRP Managed Switch are public fent E PC Workstation with Managed Switch SNMP application SNMP Agent Status Enabled a Lnternet ID Address IP Address 192 168 0 100 192 168 0 x Figure 3 1 5 SNMP management 3 6 PLANET S
83. trunk type Static Force aggregated selected ports to be a trunk group LACP LACP LAG negotiate Aggregated Port links with other LACP ports located on a different device If the other device ports are also LACP ports the devices establish a LAG between them e Ports Select port number from this drop down list to establish Link Aggregation LAG Management Information Gel rant it Gel Chanel E it SSES ER et ower Fi em Figure 4 4 5 LAG Management Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description 114 PLANET Networking amp Communication e LAG e Name e Type e Link State e Active Member e Standby Member e Modify 4 4 3 LAG Port Setting User s Manual of LRP 422CST The LAG for the settings contained in the same row Display the current name Display the current type Display the link state Display the active member Display the standby member Click Edit to modify LAG configuration This page allows setting configuration for each LAG The LAG Port Setting screens in Figure 4 4 6 amp Figure 4 4 7 appear LAG Port settings LAG Select Enabled Flow control Select LAGs Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Apply Figure 4 4 6 LAG Port Setting Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e LAG Select e Enable e Speed e Flow Control Description Select LAG number from this drop down l
84. unicast address including those that were discarded or not sent The number of inbound packets which is chosen to be discarded even though no errors have been detected to prevent from being delivered to a higher layer protocol One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space The number of packets delivered by this sub layer to a higher sub layer is addressed to a multicast address at this sub layer The number of packets delivered by this sub layer to a higher sub layer addressed to a broadcast address at this sub layer The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested is transmitted and is addressed to a multicast address at this sub layer including those that were discarded or not sent The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested is transmitted and addressed to a broadcast address at this sub layer including those that were discarded or not sent Counters Value eet oes IO ES Single Colson Frames id Mulls Colision Frames E Defered Tee dO e Eessen O O O ooo C dO sme Odd emt Unknow Opeedes E inPauseFames dO aeren fo Object e Alignment Errors e FCS Errors Figure 4 3 5 Ethernet link Counters Page Screenshot Description The number of alignment errors missynchronized data packets A count of frames received on a particular interface that are an integral number of octets in length but do not pass the FCS check This count doe
85. 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 o ede ren Auto Yes Forwarding D Min ak a avuin ee sooo 00 UU UU UU DOOD o U U Oo 00 00 00 00 00 00 jo oOo 00 00 00 00 00 00 ji 00 00 00 00 00 00 0 n Figure 4 6 11 CIST Port Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Port Identifier Priority Port ID External Path Cost Conf Oper Internal Path Cost Conf Oper Designated Root Bridge External Root Cost Regional Root Bridge Internal Root Cost Designated Bridge Internal Port Path Cost Edge Port Conf Oper P2P MAC Conf Oper Port Role Port State Description The switch port number of the logical STP port Display the current identifier Priority Port ID Display the current external path cost conf oper Display the current internal path cost oper Display the current designated root bridge Display the current external root cost Display the current regional root bridge Display the current internal root cost Display the current designated bridge Display the current internal port path cost Display the current edge port conf oper Display the current P2P MAC conf oper Display the current port role Display the current port state 166 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 6 6 MST Instance Configuration This page allows the user to configure MST Instance Configuration The MST Instance Setting Information
86. 143 RMON Event BOG E 343 d 714 ARMON Alamm eee 344 El e IS TORY E 347 A146 RMON History LOQ acetates ate cacece REE eee a nc Succes esiv nce Vac AEE a eee eee eee 349 A19 Power over Ethernet soseen eege 350 4 15 1 Long Reach Power over Ethernet Powered Device renne 351 4 15 2 Syslem COMMOLUPANOMN EE 351 4 15 3 Power over Ethernet Confguraton ttrt srtrtsrtrrsrtrrsnrrnsnn trenn treanrenanrres reenn 352 A194 Ces EN EE 354 4 15 5 PoE Alive Check Configuration EE 357 ATO MIME NINO E saaran ENE O E E E E AEA 359 A VO Al Fact ry D Clasicos acpeeeestaschcecdesnenadetvensbhenaedeesgpesieesedenctee ba eheue Eaei ese An a Eere aiaei ehair 359 4 16 2 Reboot Mt Switch 360 A 160 BackUp EE Eet 360 4 16 4 Upgrade MANAUS E 361 e d Le RE NAG Semnetanerniaentias veanctaesatb serena caseadieenvnanstie el tieeatinemetaseubhoedtonametoaeitiaeathaenetarntiernsteres ieest nae TaverdbeesPpnerriats 362 5 SWITCH OPERATION iecnnccntrenaranas ants seteussoncaospnscrauanbuabhvanavaisonbvontvessuabdewobesotoussuseaospbssrauenes 364 o Address Eeer 364 S2 LENNO EE 364 59 Forwarding S LE e D 364 5 4 SlOre and FOrWard EEN 364 5 9 AMO NEgO USTOM ricsina ENEE AEA EE E EAS 365 6 TROUBLESHOOTING mereen e EEEE EAEE 366 da E E A E E A A A A A AA 368 A 1 Switch s RJ45 Pin Assignments ssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn 368 A 2 10 TOOMDDS 10 100BASE TX iiisonueipi aaia aa a e a 368 PLANET
87. 2 7 7 SNMPv1 2 Notification Recipients Configure SNMPv1 and 2 notification recipients on this page The SNMPv1 2 Notification Recipients screens in Figure 4 2 31 amp Figure 4 2 32 appear SNMPv1 2 Host Setting Server Address SNMP Version Notify Type Community Name UDP Port TimeOut Retries C m a e a eee Add Figure 4 2 31 SNMPv1 2 Notification Recipients Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Server Address Indicates the SNMP trap destination address It allows a valid IP address in dotted decimal notation x y z w It can also represent a legally valid IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 e SNMP Version Indicates the SNMP trap supported version Possible versions are E SNMP v1 Set SNMP trap supported version 1 E SNMP v2c Set SNMP trap supported version 2c e Notify Type Set the notify type in traps or informs e Community Name Indicates the community access string when send SNMP trap packet e UDP Port Indicates the SNMP trap destination port SNMP Agent will send SNMP message via this port the port range is 1 65535 e Time Out Indicates the SNMP trap inform timeout The allowed range is 1 to 300 e Retries Indicates the SNMP trap inform retry times The allowed range is 1 to 255 Buttons Add Click to add a new SNMP v1 2 host entry SANMPV1 2 Host Status Server Address SNMP Version Notify Type UDP Port TimeOut Retry Action
88. 2CST The Ether Type and VLAN ID are inserted after the MAC source address but before the original Ether Type Length or Logical Link Control Because the packet is now a bit longer than it was originally the Cyclic Redundancy Check CRC must be recalculated Adding an IEEE802 1Q Tag Dest Addr EI Length E type rm Old CRC Original Ethernet Dest Addr Sreadar Epe Taa Length E type EN New CRC New Tagged Packet HM Port VLAN ID Packets that are tagged are carrying the 802 1Q VID information can be transmitted from one 802 1Q compliant network device to another with the VLAN information intact This allows 802 1Q VLAN to span network devices and indeed the entire network if all network devices are 802 1Q compliant Every physical port on a switch has a PVID 802 1Q ports are also assigned a PVID for use within the switch If no VLAN are defined on the switch all ports are then assigned to a default VLAN with a PVID equal to 1 Untagged packets are assigned the PVID of the port on which they were received Forwarding decisions are based upon this PVID in so far as VLAN are concerned Tagged packets are forwarded according to the VID contained within the tag Tagged packets are also assigned a PVID but the PVID is not used to make packet forwarding decisions the VID is Tag aware switches must keep a table to relate PVID within the switch to VID on the network The switch will compare the VID of a packet to be transmitt
89. 4 12 14 amp Figure 4 12 15 appear MED Location Configuration Location Coordinate Select Ports 16 pairs of hexadecimal characters 6 160 pairs of hexadecimal characters 10 25 pairs of hexadecimal characters Apply The page includes the following fields Figure 4 12 14 Port LLDP MED Configuration Page Screenshot Object Buttons Apply Port Location Coordinate Location Civic Address Location ESC ELIN Click to apply changes Description Select port from this drop down list A string identifying the Location Coordinate that this entry should belong to A string identifying the Location Civic Address that this entry should belong to A string identifying the Location ESC ELIN that this entry should belong to 330 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST LLDP MED Port Location Table Co or i lina ite E ECS E E L IN p EE vn e ooo e e BE Get Een WE WS ee a a Figure 4 12 15 LLDP MED Port Location Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Coordinate Display the current coordinate e Civic Address Display the current civic address e ESC ELIN Display the current ESC ELIN 331 PLANET Networking amp Communication 4 12 8 LLDP Overloading User s Manual of LRP 422CST The LLDP Port Overloading screen in Figure 4 12 16 appears
90. ADIUS Authentication Server If the port is set to 0 zero the default port 1812 is used on the RADIUS Authentication Server The UDP port to use on the RADIUS Accounting Server If the port is set to 0 zero the default port 1813 is used on the RADIUS Accounting Server The shared key shared between the RADIUS Authentication Server and the switch The Timeout which can be set to a number between 1 and 30 seconds is the maximum time to wait for a reply from a server If the server does not reply within this timeframe we will consider it to be dead and continue with the next enabled server if any RADIUS servers are using the UDP protocol which is unreliable by design In order to cope with lost frames the timeout interval is divided into 3 subintervals of equal length If a reply is not received within the subinterval the request is transmitted again This algorithm causes the RADIUS server to be queried up to 3 times before it is considered to be dead Timeout is the number of seconds in the range 1 to 10 to wait for a reply from a RADIUS server before retransmitting the request Set the server priority The Dead Time which can be set to a number between 0 and 3600 seconds is the period during which the switch will not send new requests to a server that has failed to respond to a previous request This will stop the switch from continually trying to contact a server that it has already determined as dead Setting the De
91. Agent Alarm depends on the implementation of Event Statistics and History display some current or history subnet statistics Alarm and Event provide a method to monitor any integer data change in the network and provide some alerts upon abnormal events sending Trap or record in logs 4 14 1 RMON Statistics This page provides a detail of a specific RMON statistics entry RMON Statistics screen in Figure 4 14 1 appears 339 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST RMON Statistics Port GET RMON Statistics Port GEI e Clear RMON Counters Value Drop Events Octets ffaibo CRO Alignment rors fo Uniesine Packets fo Ome Pacts fo Fagens fo e Re oss fo DEELER Figure 4 14 1 RMON Statistics Detail Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select port from this drop down list e Drop Events The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of resources e Octets The total number of octets of data including those in bad packets received on the network 340 PLANET Networking amp Communication Buttons lear Packets Broadcast Packets Multicast Packets CRC Alignment Errors Undersize Packets Oversize Packets Fragments Jabbers Collisions 64 Byte Frame 65 127 Byte Frames 128 255 Byte Frames 256 511 Byte Frames 512 1023 Byte Frames 1024 1518 Byte Frames
92. Anto 1000M w Apply Figure 4 3 1A Port Settings Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select Select port number from this drop down list e Enabled Indicates the port state operation Possible states are Enabled Start up the port manually 88 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST Disabled Shut down the port manually e Speed Select any available link speed for the given switch port Draw the menu bar to select the mode S Auto Setup Auto negotiation Auto 10M Setup 10M Auto negotiation Auto 100M Setup 100M Auto negotiation Auto 1000M Setup 1000M Auto negotiation Auto 10 100M Setup 10 100M Auto negotiation 10M Setup 10M Force mode 100M Setup 100M Force mode 1000M Setup 1000M Force mode e Duplex Select any available link duplex for the given switch port Draw the menu bar to select the mode m Auto Setup Auto negotiation a Full Force sets Full Duplex mode S Half Force sets Halt Duplex mode e Flow Control When Auto Speed is selected for a port this section indicates the flow control capability that is advertised to the link partner When a fixed speed setting is selected that is what is used Current Rx column indicates whether pause frames on the port are obeyed Current Tx column indicates whether pause frames on the port are transmitted The Rx and Tx settings are determined by the result of the last A
93. Based ACE Table User s Manual of LRP 422CST 8 LU H LU Name eduence Action mac Wildcard MAC Wildcard um 802 1P Mask Modify Address Mask Address Mask Figure 4 10 4 MAC based ACE Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e ACL Name e Sequence e Action e Destination MAC Address e Destination MAC Address Mask e Source MAC Address e Source MAC Address Mask e VLAN ID e 802 1p e 802 1p Mask e EtherType e Modify Description Display the current ACL name Display the current sequence Display the current action Display the current destination MAC address Display the current destination MAC address mask Display the current source MAC address Display the current source MAC address mask Display the current VLAN ID Display the current 802 1p value Display the current 802 1p mask Display the current EtherType Edit Click to edit MAC based ACL parameter Click Delete to delete MAC based ACL entry 296 PLANET deene gege User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 10 3 IPv4 based ACL This page shows the ACL status by different ACL users Each row describes the ACE that is defined It is a conflict if a specific ACE is not applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations Pv4 based ACL screens in Figure 4 10 5 amp Figure 4 10 6 appear IPv4 Based ACL IPv4 Based ACL Add Figure 4 10 5 IPv4 based ACL Page Screenshot The page includes the following fi
94. Configuration Revision I Figure 4 6 5 STP Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e STP Display the current STP state e BPDU Forward Display the current BPDU forward mode e Cost Method Display the current cost method e Force Version Display the current force version e Configuration Name Display the current configuration name e Configuration Revision Display the current configuration revision 4 6 3 STP Port Setting This page allows you to configure per port STP settings The STP Port Setting screens in Figure 4 6 6 amp Figure 4 6 7 appear STP Port Setting Port Select are i P2P MAC Migrate Bute pa d Guar se Iesele es eao Apply Figure 4 6 6 STP Port Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields 160 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST Description e Port Select Select port number from this drop down list e External Cost 0 Controls the path cost incurred by the port The Auto setting will set the path cost Auto as appropriate by the physical link speed using the 802 1D recommended values Using the Specific setting a user defined value can be entered The path cost is used when establishing the active topology of the network Lower path cost ports are chosen as forwarding ports in favor of higher path cost ports Valid values are in the range 1 to 200000000 e Edge Port Control
95. DHCP snooping mode operation is enabled the request DHCP messages will be forwarded to trusted ports and only allowed reply packets from trusted ports WR Disabled Disable DHCP snooping mode operation Buttons Appl PPY Click to apply changes DHCP Snooping VLAN Setting Figure 4 9 38 DHCP Snooping VLAN Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN List Display the current VLAN list e Status Display the current DHCP snooping status 261 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 9 7 4 Port Setting Configures switch ports as trusted or untrusted Command Usage e A trusted interface is an interface that is configured to receive only messages from within the network An untrusted interface is an interface that is configured to receive messages from outside the network or firewall e When DHCP snooping is enabled both globally and on a VLAN DHCP packet filtering will be performed on any untrusted ports within the VLAN e When an untrusted port is changed to a trusted port all the dynamic DHCP snooping bindings associated with this port are removed e Set all ports connected to DHCP servers within the local network or firewall to trusted state Set all other ports outside the local network or firewall to untrusted state The DHCP Snooping Port Setting screens in Figure 4 9 39 amp Figure 4 9 40 appear DHCP Snooping Port Setting
96. EA E between them Link Aggregation og Pay y LY Link Aggregation 4 Port Link Aggregation Up to 4 Gbps E Figure 4 4 1 Link Aggregation 111 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST The Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP provides a standardized means for exchanging information between Partner Systems that require high speed redundant links Link aggregation lets you group up to eight consecutive ports into a single dedicated connection This feature can expand bandwidth to a device on the network LACP operation requires full duplex mode For more detailed information refer to the IEEE 802 3ad standard Port link aggregations can be used to increase the bandwidth of a network connection or to ensure fault recovery Link aggregation lets you group up to 8 consecutive ports into a single dedicated connection between any two the Switch or other Layer 2 switches However before making any physical connections between devices use the Link Aggregation Configuration menu to specify the link aggregation on the devices at both ends When using a port link aggregation note that e The ports used in a link aggregation must all be of the same media type RJ45 100 Mbps fiber e The ports that can be assigned to the same link aggregation have certain other restrictions see below e Ports can only be assigned to one link aggregation e The ports at both ends of a connection must be co
97. ED Network Policy Table screens in Figure 4 12 10 amp Figure 4 12 11 appear 325 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST LLDP MED Network Policy Setting Voice Auto Mode Configuration LLDP MED Policy for Voice Application Auto Apply Network Policy Configuration Network Policy Number Application Voice VLAN ID 1 4094 VLAN Tag Tagged Untagged L2 Priority 0 7 DSCP Value Apply Figure 4 12 10 Voice Auto Mode Configuration and Network Policy Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e LLDP MED Policy for Voice Application e Network Policy Number e Application Type Description Set the LLDP MED policy for voice application mode Select network policy number for this drop down list Intended use of the application types Voice for use by dedicated IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services These devices are typically deployed on a separate VLAN for ease of deployment and enhanced security by isolation from data applications Voice Signaling for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the voice signaling than for the voice media This application type should not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Voice application policy Guest Voice support a separate limited feature set voice service for guest u
98. ET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST Buttons Apply Click to apply changes RMON Event Index Event Type Figure 4 14 3 RMON Event Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Index Display the current event index e Event Type Display the current event type e Community Display the current community for SNMP trap e Description Display the current event description e Last Sent Time Display the current last sent time e Owner Display the current event owner e Action Click Delete to delete RMON event entry 4 14 3 RMON Event Log This page provides an overview of RMON Event Log The RMON Event Log Table screen in Figure 4 14 4 appears RMON Event Log Table RMON Event Log Table Event Index Select Event T Index Log Time Description Figure 4 14 4 RMON Event Log Table Page Screenshot 343 User s Manual of LRP 422CST The page includes the following fields Object Description e Select Index Select index from this drop down list e Index Indicates the index of the log entry e Log Time Indicates Event log time e Description Indicates the Event description 4 14 4 RMON Alarm Configure RMON Alarm table on this page The RMON Alarm screens in Figure 4 14 5 amp Figure 4 14 6 appear RMON Alarm Settings RMON Alarm sample Variable CropEvents sample Interval 1 214 4o564 r sample Type Absolute Delta Appl
99. FTP client BOOTP and DHCP for IP address assignment System maintenance Firmware upload download via HTTP TFTP Configuration upload download through Web interface Dual images Hardware reset button for system reboot or reset to factory default SNTP Network Time Protocol Cable diagnostics Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP and LLDP MED SNMP trap for interface linkup and linkdown notifications Event message logging to remote Syslog server Four RMON groups history statistics alarms and events PLANET Smart Discovery utility 19 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 1 5 Product Specifications LRP 422CST 2 x 10 100 1000BASE T RJ45 Auto negotiation Auto MDI MDI X Hardware Specifications Ethernet 2 X 100 1000BASE X SFP slot Supports 100 1000Mbps dual mode and DDM Interfaces Fiber Optic lokbytes with GE to GE4 4 x BNC female connectors SS Long Reach PoE over coaxial PSE Power Source Equipment Connectivity E BNC center pole DC Hi mE BNC shield DC Lo Power Output Per port 48 56V DC 36 watts max Total Power Budget 150 watts max Coaxial cable 75 ohm gang RG 6 U cable Recommended Max 200m with PoE output 1 64 0ft Maximum Distance Max 400m with PoE output 2 624ft Max 1200m without PoE output 3 937ft Long Reach IEEE 1901 Ethernet Standard Modulation Type Wavelet OFDM 128 bit AES encryp
100. ID e Regional Root Bridge Display the current designated root bridge e Internal Root Cost Display the current internal root cost e Designated Bridge Display the current designated bridge e Root Port Display the current root port e Max Age Display the current max age e Forward Delay Display the current forward delay e Remaining Hops Display the current remaining hops e Last Topology Change Display the current last topology change 168 PLANET Networking amp Communication 4 6 7 MST Port Setting User s Manual of LRP 422CST This page allows the user to inspect the current STP MSTI port configurations and possibly change them as well A MSTI port is a virtual port which is instantiated separately for each active CIST physical port for each MSTI instance configured and applicable for the port The MSTI instance must be selected before displaying actual MSTI port configuration options This page contains MSTI port settings for physical and aggregated ports The aggregation settings are global The MSTI Ports Setting screens in Figure 4 6 15 amp Figure 4 6 16 appear MST Port Setting Internal Path Cost Port Select Priority 0 Auto The page includes the following fields Apply Figure 4 6 15 MST Port Configuration Page Screenshot Object Buttons Apply MST ID Port Select Priority Internal Path Cost 0 Auto Click to apply changes Description Enter the special MS
101. Indicates the SNMP trap inform timeout The allowed range is 1 to 300 Indicates the SNMP trap inform retry times The allowed range is 1 to 255 84 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST Add Click to add a new SNMPv3 host entry SNMPvS Host Status Figure 4 2 34 SNMPv3 Host Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Server Address Display the current server address e Notify Type Display the current notify type e User Name Display the current user name e UDP Port Display the current UDP port e Time Out Display the current time out e Retries Display the current retry times e Action Boe Delete the SNMPv3 host entry 4 2 7 9 SNMP Engine ID Configure SNMPv3 Engine ID on this page The entry index key is Engine ID The remote engine ID is used to compute the security digest for authenticating and encrypting packets sent to a user on the remote host The SNMPv3 Engine ID Setting screens in Figure 4 2 35 amp Figure 4 2 36 appear Engine ID Setting t Enable Disable __ SS F ke G SI In gie Mme eae m r 8 E SIRNSEKGERE RER ETS EN Figure 4 2 35 SNMPv3 Engine ID Setting Page Screenshot 85 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST The page includes the following fields Object Description e Engine ID An octet string identifying the engine ID that t
102. Internal Path Cost 0 Auto Figure 4 6 10 CIST Port Setting Page Screenshot Description Select port number from this drop down list Controls the port priority This can be used to control priority of ports having identical port cost See above Default 128 Range 0 240 in steps of 16 Controls the path cost incurred by the port The Auto setting will set the path cost as appropriate by the physical link speed using the 802 1D recommended values Using the Specific setting a user defined value can be entered The path cost is used when establishing the active topology of the network Lower path cost ports are chosen as forwarding ports in favor of higher path cost ports Valid values are in the range 1 to 200000000 165 PLANET Networking amp Communication Buttons Apply Click to apply changes User s Manual of LRP 422CST CIST Port Status 126 2 U 200000 10 200000 dere U 200000 0 200000 00 00 00 00 00 00 External Path Cost e ir ed Designated Root External Regional Root Sorli Port ID Conf Oper Conf Oper 2 49 ee ee Cost Di 1286 1 O 200000 0 200000 00 00 00 00 00 00 07200000 i i i i i of LAG2 128 10 Ja 20000 Jo 20000 Jade moon o LAG3 128 11 or20000 or20000 2 OF OF Noe hur EE E Ae E HE 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 LaG4 128 12 or20000 or20000 2 Of Of ow EE RER det lee 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
103. LAG Status Displays LAG status LACP information 4 4 1 LAG Setting This page allows configuring load balance algorithm configuration settings The LAG Setting screens in Figure 4 4 2 amp Figure 4 4 3 appear 112 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST LAG Setting LAG Setting m MAC Address IP MAC Address Figure 4 4 2 LAG Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Load Balance Select load balance algorithm mode Algorithm E MAC Address The MAC address can be used to calculate the port for the frame E IP MAC Address The IP and MAC address can be used to calculate the port for the frame Buttons Appl HE Click to apply changes LAG Information Information Name Information Value Figure 4 4 3 LAG Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Load Balance Algorithm Display the current load balance algorithm 113 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 4 2 LAG Management This page is used to configure the LAG management The LAG Management screens in Figure 4 4 4 amp Figure 4 4 5 appear eels sel hl Apply Figure 4 4 4 LAG Management Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e LAG Select LAG number from this drop down list e Name Indicates each LAG name e Type Indicates the
104. LAN ID is set to if a port is moved into the Guest VLAN It is only changeable if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled Valid values are in the range 1 4094 A Guest VLAN is a special VLAN typically with limited network access on which 802 1X unaware clients are placed after a network administrator defined timeout The switch follows a set of rules for entering and leaving the Guest VLAN as listed below The Guest VLAN Enabled checkbox provides a quick way to globally enable disable Guest VLAN functionality E When checked the individual porte ditto setting determines whether the port can be moved into Guest VLAN mM When unchecked the ability to move to the Guest VLAN is disabled for all ports When Guest VLAN is both globally enabled and enabled checked for a given port the switch considers moving the port into the Guest VLAN according to the rules outlined below This option is only available for EAPOL based modes i e e Port based 802 1X 236 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST Appl HEH Click to apply changes Guest VLAN Status Port Name In Guest VLAN Figure 4 9 8 Guest VLAN Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Name The switch port number of the logical port e Enable State Display the current state e In Guest VLAN Display the current guest VLAN 237 PLANET Networking amp
105. Loop protection to avoid broadcast loops Quality of Service Mi Ingress egress rate limit per port bandwidth control Hi Storm control support Broadcast unknown unicast unknown multicast Mi Traffic classification IEEE 802 1p CoS ToS DSCP IP Precedence of IPv4 IPv6 packets WW Strict priority and Weighted Round Robin WRR CoS policies Multicast Mi Supports IGMP snooping v2 and v3 Supports MLD snooping v1 v2 IGMP querier mode support IGMP snooping port filtering MLD snooping port filtering Security WW Authentication 18 PLANET ne User s Manual of LRP 422CST IEEE 802 1X Port based network access authentication Built in RADIUS client to co operate with the RADIUS servers RADIUS TACACS login user access authentication Mi Access Control List Pv4 IPv6 IP based ACL MAC based ACL MAC Security Static MAC MAC filtering Port security for source MAC address entries filtering DHCP snooping to filter untrusted DHCP messages Dynamic ARP inspection discards ARP packets with invalid MAC address to IP address binding IP source guard prevents IP spoofing attacks DoS attack prevention SSH SSL i gt Management Mi IPv4 and IPv6 dual stack management Mi Switch management interface Web switch management Telnet command line interface SNMP v1 v2c and v3 SSH SSL secure access User privilege levels control Built in Trivial File Transfer Protocol T
106. MP View Table Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e View Name Display the current SNMP view name e Subtree OID Display the current SNMP subtree OID e OID Mask Display the current SNMP OID mask e View Type Display the current SNMP view type e Action Delete Delete the view table entry 78 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 2 7 5 SNMP Access Group Configure SNMPv3 access group on this page The entry index keys are Group Name Security Model and Security Level The SNMPv3 Access Group Setting screens in Figure 4 2 27 amp Figure 4 2 28 appear Access Group Setting Security Model Security Level Read View Name Write View Name Notify View Name C bk a fon se Figure 4 2 27 SNMPv3 Access Group Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Group Name A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 16 e Security Model Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are E v1 Reserved for SNMPv1 S v2c Reserved for SNMPv2c a V3 Reserved for SNMPv3 or User based Security Model USM e Security Level Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are S Noauth None authentication and none privacy security levels are assigned to the group m auth Au
107. N Mode Display the current interface VLAN mode e PVID Display the current PVID e Accepted Frame Type Display the current access frame type e Ingress Filtering Display the current ingress filtering e Uplink Display the current uplink mode e TPID Display the current TPID 132 PL Networking A NET User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 5 6 Port to VLAN Use the VLAN Static Table to configure port members for the selected VLAN index This page allows you to add and delete port members of each VLAN The screen in Figure 4 5 7 appears Port to VLAN Port to VLAN Settings WLAN ID 1 d Interface VLAN Mode Membership PVID Forbidden Excluded Tagged 5 Untaggea J Forbidden Excluded Tagged 5 Untagged Forbidden Excluded Tagged Untagged Forbidden Excluded Tagged 5 Untagged Forbidden Excluded Tagged Untagged J Forbidden Excluded Tagged 5 Untaggea Forbidden Excluded Tagged 5 Untagged Forbidden Excluded Tagged 5 Untaggea J Forbidden Excluded Tagged Untagged Forbidden Excluded Tagged 5 Untagged Figure 4 5 7 Port to VLAN Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID Select VLAN ID from this drop down list to assign VLAN membership e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Interface VLAN Mode Display the current interface VLAN mode e Membership Select VLAN membership for each interface by marking the appropriate radio button f
108. P Rate Limit Disable ARP Rate Limit Disable Figure 4 3 14 Error Disabled Information Page Screenshot Object Recovery Interval BPDU Guard Self Loop Broadcast Flood Unknown Multicast Flood Unicast Flood ACL Port Security Violation DHCP Rate Limit ARP Rate Limit Description Display the current recovery interval time Display the current BPDU guard status Display the current self loop status Display the current broadcast flood status Display the current unknown multicast flood status Display the current unicast flood status Display the current ACL status Display the current port security violation status Display the current DHCP rate limit status Display the current ARP rate limit status 103 PLANET Networking A Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 3 8 Port Error Disabled This page provides disable that transitions a port into error disable and the recovery options The ports were disabled by some protocols such as BPDU Guard Loopback and UDLD The Port Error Disable screen in Figure 4 3 15 appears Port Error Disabled Status Port Error Disabled Status Error Disabled Reason Time Left Seconds Figure 4 3 15 Port Error Disable Page Screenshot The displayed counters are Object Description e Port Name Display the port for error disable e Error Disable Reason Display the error disabled reason of the port e Time Left Seconds Display the time left 4 3 9 Protect
109. Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e OUI Address A telephony OUI address is a globally unique identifier assigned to a vendor by IEEE It must be 6 characters long and the input format is xx xx xx x is a hexadecimal digit e Description User defined text that identifies the VolP devices Buttons Add Click to add voice VLAN OUI setting DU HOPEA ebe Figure 4 8 25 Voice VLAN OUI Group Page Screenshot 225 PLANET Networking amp Communication The page includes the following fields Object e OUI Address e Description e Modify User s Manual of LRP 422CST Description Display the current OUI address Display the current description Edit Click to edit voice VLAN OUI group parameter Click Delete to delete voice VLAN OUI group parameter 4 8 5 4 Telephony OUI Port Setting The Voice VLAN feature enables voice traffic forwarding on the Voice VLAN then the switch can classify and schedule network traffic It is recommended that there be two VLANs on a port one for voice and one for data Before connecting the IP device to the switch the IP phone should configure the voice VLAN ID correctly It should be configured through its own GUI The Telephony OUI MAC Setting screens in Figure 4 8 26 amp Figure 4 8 27 appear The page includes the following fields Voice VLAN Fort SEE O Enabled Disabled OAI Sre Apply Figure 4 8 26 Voice
110. Policies are only intended for use with applications that have specific real time network policy requirements such as interactive voice and or video services The network policy attributes advertised are 1 Layer 2 VLAN ID IEEE 802 1Q 2003 2 Layer 2 priority value IEEE 802 1D 2004 3 Layer 3 Diffserv code point DSCP value IETF RFC 2474 This network policy is potentially advertised and associated with multiple sets of application types supported on a given port The application types specifically addressed are 1 Voice 2 Guest Voice 3 Softphone Voice 4 Video Conferencing 5 Streaming Video 6 Control Signaling conditionally support a separate network policy for the media types above A large network may support multiple VoIP policies across the entire organization and different policies per application type LLDP MED allows multiple policies to be advertised per port each corresponding to a different application type Different ports on the same Network Connectivity Device may advertise different sets of policies based on the authenticated user identity or port configuration It should be noted that LLDP MED is not intended to run on links other than between Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoints and therefore does not need to advertise the multitude of network policies that frequently run on an aggregated link interior to the LAN The Voice Auto Mode Configuration Network Policy Configuration and LLDP M
111. Q A BEER 146 4 5 14 2 VLAN Trunking between Two 802 1Q Aware Switches cccccecccceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeseaeeeesaaeeesaeeeesaasees 149 AG Spanning Tree Protocol ME 152 EEN E EEE E E EE 152 AO Zorr GODI 19 EE 158 AO oO all el Le E S E E E eee 160 4 6 4 CIST Instance Setting AA 163 AGa CIST Pon SCUO DE 165 46 6 MST Instance elteren WE 167 AGT MST Porn oeM e EE 169 AOS e 171 A MUNIC E 172 e EE Gd elen 172 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST Se 2 ONP MOO DING eaae acceso edie ses oes a wee eed gee cee ne ee eaten eadnane eee 174 E Ne Setting DEE 178 A Tose 2 OMP QUerner d Le EE 180 4TA OMP Statie OI EE 181 4 1 2 4 IGMP Group Table ee eee een eee eee eee 182 4A 7 29 IGMP Router Seling EE 183 A E GMP ROUE E e EE 184 Decal IGMP Forward EE 186 AT OMS SI OO DING E e 187 AA MED SNOODINO EE 189 KATMISE MN enn a E E a A Ee 189 4 TAA MLD Statie GrOOD E 191 4 7 4 3 MLD Group Ee 192 4 7 4 4 MLD Router Setting cccccecccccseeeccesececceseecceescecceucecseueeessegeeessecessegeeessaueeessueeeeseueeeeessseesseuesessegeesseass 193 AT Avo MLO ROUET Ee 194 E MED tee NEE 196 4 O MLD Snooping EE Le 197 4 7 6 Multicast Throttling Setting c cc cccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeesaeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeaeeeeeseeeeeseeeesaeeeeesaeees 199 hat WMI AS CN LSU eene ere 200 ALT 71 Multicast Profile Setting E 201 e T 1 2 IGMP Filter Setting WE 203 AF MED Fi
112. R Don t Care Any value is allowed don t care PSH Specify the TCP Push Function PSH value for this ACE M Set TCP frames where the PSH field is set must be able to match this entry E Unset TCP frames where the PSH field is set must not be able to match this entry WR Don t Care Any value is allowed don t care RST Specify the TCP Reset the connection RST value for this ACE E Set TCP frames where the RST field is set must be able to match this entry E Unset TCP frames where the RST field is set must not be able to match this entry 306 PLANET Networking amp Communication e Type of Service e ICMP e ICMP Code User s Manual of LRP 422CST ae WR Don t Care Any value is allowed don t care SYN Specify the TCP Synchronize sequence numbers SYN value for this FIN ACE E Set TCP frames where the SYN field is set must be able to match this entry E Unset TCP frames where the SYN field is set must not be able to match this entry WR Don t Care Any value is allowed don t care Specify the TCP No more data from sender FIN value for this ACE E Set TCP frames where the FIN field is set must be able to match this entry E Unset TCP frames where the FIN field is set must not be able to match this entry WR Don t Care Any value is allowed don t care Specify the type of service for this ACE Any No specific type of service is specified destination p
113. RP Managed Switch Reset the LRP Managed Switch to the Factory Default configuration The LRP Managed Switch will then reboot and load the default settings shown below Default Username admin Default Password admin Default IP Address 192 168 0 100 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 192 168 0 254 gt 5 sec Factory Default 2 1 3 LED Indications The front panel LEDs indicates instant status of port links data activity and system power it helps monitor and troubleshoot when needed HM System Alert Color Function a Lights To indicate power 1 has power pm 1 Green Lights To indicate power 2 has power Fault Red Lights To indicate either power 1 or power 2 has no power Mi Long Reach PoE Interfaces Port 1 to Port 4 Color Function EET Lights To indicate the link through that port is successfully established PoE Orange Lights To indicate the port is providing DC in line power HM 10 100 1000BASE T Interfaces GEI to GE2 LED Color Function LNK ACT Green Lights To indicate the link through that port is successfully established 26 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST Blinking To indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port Lights To indicate that the port is operating at 1O00Mbps 1000 Orange Lights If LNK ACT LED lights up it indicates that the port is operating at 10 100Mbps Off I
114. RP Managed Switch provides a Web based browser interface for configuring and managing it This interface allows you to access the LRP Managed Switch using the Web browser of your choice This chapter describes how to use the LRP Managed Switch s Web browser interface to configure and manage it Copper Port Link Status LRP Port Link Status SFP Port Link Status Main Screen Main Functions Menu GE SI DPLANET 0000 F SAVE LOGOUT WEBOOT REFRESH LRP 422CST e Welcome to PLANET VLAN V LRP 422CST Industrial 4 Port Coax Long Reach PoE 2 Port 10 100 1000T 2 Port 100 1000X SFP Managed Switch PLANET Technology Corporation 10F No 96 Minquan Rd Xindian Dist New Taipei City 231 Taiwan R O C Tel 886 2 2219 9518 Fax 886 2 2219 9528 Email support planet com tw Copyright 2015 PLANET Technology Corporation All rights reserved Figure 4 1 4 Main Page Panel Display The Web agent displays an image of the LRP Managed Switch s ports The Mode can be set to display different information for the ports including Link up or Link down Clicking on the image of a port opens the Port Statistics page The port states are illustrated as follows 52 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST State Disabled Down Link LRP Ports RJ45 Ports Pa L J SFP Ports a Lal Main Menu Using the onboard Web agent you can define system parameters manage and control th
115. ST 4 9 8 4 Statistics Configures switch ports as DAI trusted or untrusted and check mode DAI Port Setting screen in Figure 4 9 58 appears Dynamic ARP Inspection Statistics Dynamic ARP Inspection Statistics Clear Refresh Figure 4 9 58 DAI Port Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Forwarded Display the current forwarded Source MAC Failures Display the current source MAC failures e Dest MAC Failures Display the current source MAC failures 276 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST e SIP Validation Failures Display the current SIP Validation failures e DIP Validation Failures Display the current DIP Validation failures e IP MAC Mismatch Display the current IP MAC mismatch failures Failures Buttons Clear o Click to clear the statistics Refresh l Click to refresh the statistics 4 9 8 5 Rate Limit The ARP Rate Limit Setting and Config screens in Figure 4 9 59 amp Figure 4 9 60 appear ARP Rate Limit ARP Rate Limit Setting Select Ports Default User Define Unlimited Up to 50 pps Apply Figure 4 9 59 ARP Rate Limit Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select port from this drop down list e State Set default or user define e Rate Limit pps Configure the rate limit for the port pol
116. T ID to configure path cost and priority Select port number from this drop down list Controls the port priority This can be used to control priority of ports having identical port cost Controls the path cost incurred by the port The Auto setting will set the path cost as appropriate by the physical link speed using the 802 1D recommended values Using the Specific setting a user defined value can be entered The path cost is used when establishing the active topology of the network Lower path cost ports are chosen as forwarding ports in favor of higher path cost ports Valid values are in the range 1 to 200000000 169 PLANET Networking amp Communication a Fei en a User s Manual of LRP 422CST MST Port Status Bridge Root Cost The page includes the following fields F E4 GEI EIS EIS GEA LAGI LAG 120 10 0 LAG3 1240 71 Ui LAG4 120 12 Ui Object Description MSTIID Port Identifier Priority Port ID Internal Path Cost Conf Oper Regional Root Bridge Internal Root Cost Designated Bridge Internal Path Cost Port Role Port State Figure 4 6 16 MST Port Status Page Screenshot Display the current MSTI ID The switch port number of the logical STP port Display the current identifier priority port ID Display the current internal path cost configuration operation Display the current regional root bridge Display the current internal root co
117. The number of well formed TLVs but with an unknown type value The number of organizationally TLVs received 334 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 13 Diagnostics This section provide the Physical layer and IP layer network diagnostics tools for troubleshoot The diagnostic tools are designed for network manager to help them quickly diagnose problems between point to point and better service customers Use the Diagnostics menu items to display and configure basic administrative details of the LRP Managed Switch Under System the following topics are provided to configure and view the system information This section has the following items Cable Diagnostics Ping Test IPv6 Ping Test Trace Route 4 13 1 Cable Diagnostics The Cable Diagnostics performs tests on copper cables These functions have the ability to identify the cable length and operating conditions and to isolate a variety of common faults that can occur on the cat5 twisted pair cabling There might be two statuses as follows m If the link is established on the twisted pair interface in 1OOOBASE T mode the Cable Diagnostics can run without disruption of the link or of any data transfer m if the link is established in 1OOBASE TX or 10BASE T the Cable Diagnostics causes the link to drop while the diagnostics is running After the diagnostics is finished the link is reestablished And the following functions are avail
118. Type e Rising Threshold e Falling Threshold e Rising Event e Falling Event e Owner e Action 4 14 5 RMON History User s Manual of LRP 422CST Display the current interval Display the current sample type Display the current rising threshold Display the current falling threshold Display the current rising event Display the current falling event Display the current owner Click Delete to delete RMON alarm entry Configure RMON History table on this page The RMON History screens in Figure 4 14 7 amp Figure 4 14 8 appear RMON History Settings RMON History Index 0 1 65535 Sample Port FEI Bucket Requested 50 1 50 Default 50 1800 1 3600 Default 1500 Interval Owner Apply The page includes the following fields Object e Select Index e Index e Sample Port Bucket Requested O 31 characters Figure 4 14 7 RMON History Table Page Screenshot Description Select index from this drop down list to create the new index or modify the index Indicates the index of the history entry Select port from this drop down list Indicates the maximum data entries associated this History control entry stored in RMON The range is from 1 to 50 default value is 50 347 PLANET Networking A Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST e Interval Indicates the interval in seconds for sampling the history statistics data The range is from 1 to 3600 default value is 1800 seconds
119. a osme ek osae Be osme eck osae Bea ose Figure 4 8 3 QoS Port Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e CoS Value Display the current CoS value e Remark CoS Display the current remark CoS e Remark DSCP Display the current remark DSCP e Remark IP Precedence Display the current remark IP precedence 208 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 8 2 3 Queue Settings The Queue Table and Information screens in Figure 4 8 4 amp Figure 4 8 5 appear Queue Table Scheduling Method Queue Strict Priority Weight gt of WRR Bandwidth O e Ca Apply Figure 4 8 4 Queue Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Queue Display the current queue ID e Strict Priority Controls whether the scheduler mode is Strict Priority on this switch port e WRR Controls whether the scheduler mode is Weighted on this switch port e Weight Controls the weight for this queue This value is restricted to 1 100 This parameter is only shown if Scheduler Mode is set to Weighted e of WRR Bandwidth Display the current bandwidth for each queue Buttons Appl PPY Click to apply changes 209 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST Information Name Information Value strict Priority Queue Number Fi
120. able WR Coupling between cable pairs WR Cable pair termination WR Cable length Cable Diagnostics is only accurate for cables of length from 15 to 100 meters The copper test and test result screens in Figure 4 13 1 amp Figure 4 13 2 appear 335 PLANET Wetworking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST Select the port on which to run the copper test Copper Test Figure 4 13 1 Copper Test Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select port from this drop down list Buttons Copper Test Click to run the diagnostics Port Channel A Cable Length A Channel B Cable Length B Channel C Cable Length C Channel D Cable Length D Figure 4 13 2 Test Results Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The port where you are requesting Cable Diagnostics e Channel A D Display the current channel status e Cable Length A D Display the current cable length e Result Display the test result PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 13 2 Ping The ping and IPv6 ping allow you to issue ICMP ping packets to troubleshoot IP connectivity issues The LRP Managed Switch transmits ICMP packets and the sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed upon reception of a reply 4 13 3 Ping Test This page allows you to issue ICMP ping packets to troubleshoot IP connectivity issues Af
121. ad Time to a value greater than 0 zero will enable this feature but only if more than one server has been configured Set the usage type The following modes are available E Login mM 802 1X All Click to add RADIUS server setting 240 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST Login Authentication Lists IP aadress Auth Port Acct Port Key Timeout Renies Priorin Dead Time Usage Type ody Figure 4 9 12 Login Authentication List Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e IP Address Display the current IP address e Auth Port Display the current auth port e Acct Port Display the current acct port e Key Display the current key e Timeout Display the current timeout e Retries Display the current retry times e Priority Display the current priority e Dead Time Display the current dead time e Usage Type Display the current usage type e Modify Click Edit to edit login authentication list parameter Click Delete to delete login authentication list entry 241 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 9 3 TACACS Server This page is to configure the RADIUS server connection session parameters The RADIUS Settings screens in Figure 4 9 13 Figure 4 9 14 amp Figure 4 9 15 appear TACACS Server Settings Use Default Parameters Timeout for Reply 5 sec 1 30 Apply Figure 4 9 13
122. agement stations running SNMP belong to It helps define where information is sent The community name is used to identify the group An SNMP device or agent may belong to more than one SNMP community It will not respond to requests from management stations that do not belong to one of its communities SNMP default communities are Write private Read public 74 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 2 7 2 SNMP System Information Configure SNMP setting on this page The SNMP System global setting screens in Figure 4 2 21 amp Figure 4 2 22 appear SNMP Global Setting Disabled Enabled Apply Figure 4 2 21 SNMP Global Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Status Indicates the SNMP mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable SNMP mode operation Disabled Disable SNMP mode operation Buttons Appl HEH Click to apply changes SWAMP Informations SNMP Disabled Figure 4 2 22 SNMP Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e SNMP Display the current SNMP status 19 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 2 7 3 SNMP Community Configure SNMP Community on this page The SNMP Community screens in Figure 4 2 23 amp Figure 4 2 24 appear ee Setting ommuUnIity Name OM MU NIE Gre Up Name Vile aw Name Access Rig
123. and Status screens in Figure 4 6 12 Figure 4 6 13 amp Figure 4 6 14 appear MST Instance Setting TI ID 1 15 VLAN List 1 4094 Priority Apply Figure 4 6 12 MST Instance Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e MSTIID Allow to assign MSTI ID The range for the MSTI ID is 1 15 e VLAN List 1 4096 Allow to assign VLAN list to special MSTI ID The range for the VLAN list is 1 4094 e Priority Controls the bridge priority Lower numerical values have better priority The bridge priority plus the MSTI instance number concatenated with the 6 byte MAC address of the switch forms a Bridge Identifier Buttons Appl PPY Click to apply changes MST Instance Setting Information Figure 4 6 13 MSTI Instance Setting Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e MSTI Display the current MSTI entry e Status Display the current MSTI status 167 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST e VLAN List Display the current VLAN list e VLAN Count Display the current VLAN count e Priority Display the current MSTI priority MST Instance Status MSTIID Regional Root Bridge f Internal Root Cost Remaining Hops f Last Topology Change f Figure 4 6 14 MST Instance Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e MSTI ID Display the MSTI
124. ard RJ45 receptacle connector There are 8 wires on a standard UTP STP cable and each wire is color coded The following shows the pin allocation and color of straight through cable and crossover cable connection Straight through Cable 12 3 4 5 67 8 SIDE 1 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 SIDE 2 Crossover Cable 12 3 4 5 67 8 SIDE 1 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 SIDE 2 SIDE 1 1 White Orange 2 Orange 3 White Green 4 Blue 5 White Blue 6 Green 7 White Brown 8 Brown SIDE 1 1 White Orange 2 Orange 3 White Green 4 Blue 5 White Blue 6 Green 7 White Brown 8 Brown Figure A 1 Straight through and Crossover Cable SIDE 2 1 White Orange 2 Orange 3 White Green 4 Blue 5 White Blue 6 Green 7 White Brown 8 Brown SIDE 2 1 White Green 2 Green 3 White Orange 4 Blue 5 White Blue 6 Orange 7 White Brown 8 Brown Please make sure your connected cables are with the same pin assignment and color as the above table before deploying the cables into your network 369
125. ation that requests access to the LAN and switch services and responds to requests from the switch The workstation must be running 802 1X compliant client software such as that offered in the Microsoft Windows XP operating system The client is the supplicant in the IEEE 802 1X specification 229 Networking amp Communication PLANET User s Manual of LRP 422CST Authentication server performs the actual authentication of the client The authentication server validates the identity of the client and notifies the switch whether or not the client is authorized to access the LAN and switch services Because the switch acts as the proxy the authentication service is transparent to the client In this release the Remote Authentication Dial ln User Service RADIUS security system with Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP extensions is the only supported authentication server it is available in Cisco Secure Access Control Server version 3 0 RADIUS operates in a client server model in which secure authentication information is exchanged between the RADIUS server and one or more RADIUS clients Switch 802 1X device controls the physical access to the network based on the authentication status of the client The switch acts as an intermediary proxy between the client and the authentication server requesting identity information from the client verifying that information with the authentication server and relaying a response to
126. authentication by sending an EAPOL start frame which prompts the switch to request the client s identity If 802 1X is not enabled or supported on the network access device any EAPOL frames from the client are dropped If the client does not receive an EAP request identity frame after three attempts to start authentication the client transmits frames as if the port is in the authorized state A port in the authorized state effectively means that the client has been successfully authenticated When the client supplies its identity the switch begins its role as the intermediary passing EAP frames between the client and the authentication server until authentication succeeds or fails If the authentication succeeds the switch port becomes authorized The specific exchange of EAP frames depends on the authentication method being used Figure 4 9 2 shows a message exchange initiated by the client using the One Time Password OTP authentication method with a RADIUS server 230 PLANET lt Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST Authentication Client l one pane 802 1X Switch EAPOL Start EAP Request Identity EAP Response Identity RADIUS Access Request gg EAP Request OTP RADIUS Access Challenge be Kee EAP Response OTP RADIUS Access Request p EAP Success RADIUS Access Accept 4 Port Authorized EAPOL Logoff Port Unauthorized Figure 4 9 2 EAP Message Exchange E Ports
127. berately chosen as a 100 Mbps Fast Ethernet link default port cost 200 000 Gigabit ports could be used but the port cost should be increased from the default to ensure that the link between switch B and switch C is the blocked link This section has the following items S STP Global Setting Configures STP system settings a STP Port Setting Configures per port STP setting a CIST Instance Setting Configures system configuration E CIST Port Setting Configures CIST port setting DG MST Instance Setting Configures each MST instance setting G MST Port Setting Configures per port MST setting a STP Statistics Displays the STP statistics 4 6 2 STP Global Settings This page allows you to configure STP system settings The settings are used by all STP Bridge instances in the Switch The LRP Managed Switch support the following Spanning Tree Protocols Compatible Spanning Tree Protocol STP Provides a single path between end stations avoiding and eliminating loops Normal Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP Detects and uses network topologies that provide faster spanning tree convergence without creating forwarding loops Extension Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP Defines an extension to RSTP to further develop the usefulness of virtual LANs VLANs This Per VLAN Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol configures a separate Spanning Tree for each VLAN group and blocks all but one of the possible alternate paths within
128. bisane Noma Enable Disable Apply Figure 4 5 15 GVRP Global Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e Port Select e GVRP Enabled e Registration Mode e VLAN Creation Description Select port from this drop down list to assign protocol VLAN port Controls whether GVRP is enabled or disabled on port By default GVRP ports are in normal registration mode These ports use GVRP join messages from neighboring switches to prune the VLANs running across the 802 1Q trunk link If the device on the other side is not capable of sending GVRP messages or if you do not want to allow the switch to prune any of the VLANs use the fixed mode Fixed mode ports will forward for all VLANs that exist in the switch database Ports in forbidden mode forward only for VLAN 1 GVRP can dynamically create VLANs on switches for trunking purposes By enabling GVRP dynamic VLAN creation a switch will add VLANs to its database when it receives GVRP join messages about VLANs it does not have 141 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST Buttons Appl HEH Click to apply changes GVRP Port Status FEI FES KS FEA GE LGE EIS GE4 LAI 1 LAG LAG LAG4 Disable Disable Lis able Disable Disable Lis able Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Norma
129. cccccccccseccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeseaeeeeseeeeessaeeeeeeseaeeesseeeeesaaeeeesaeees 102 BO FONET WIS E WE 104 e ER POLS CICG IP OWNS EE 104 7S ar ool oe ee ee ee ev ee ee eee ene eee eee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee 107 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 43AT OFP Module NOMAN WE 108 4 3 11 1 SFP Module EE 108 4 3 11 2 SFP Module Detail Status acecsats cates tscaretentectcest Geeeunettoasannt desatensandeenteecesaey aatesnttenmetantectueiiescaneteansuanteaces 110 ALATA EIERE Ee 111 CE A EPG e E 112 4 4 2 LAG Management ccceccccceeeeeeeeeee ce eeeee eee eee eee eee eae eee AA eeE EAA EEEAAGEEEEA OS SEeAA OA EEE A AE EesA GG SeesaaaseetGaaSeeeaaaeeesaaeeetaaeeeeeas 114 re og AGP ne EE 115 Ee dt een ne ee ene E eee eee ee E on een ee ee ee 117 4 4 5 LACP Port SCN DE 118 SERA EE CITE 119 AE BE 122 4 5 1 VLAN e 122 E Re KC RE 123 A020 Management VLAN ER 127 A54 El e VLAN di ce cee rs a Sete sinn 8 nsec sete ties sive od oe dee a a a 128 4 5 5 Imerace SENOS seirce aR ed taste noe caine oc eens ie eased geese ede REEERE ASRR RAN ESAE 129 406 Porcio VLAN EE 133 49 Tr Obl VAIN Members NiD ER 135 4 5 8 Protocol VLAN Group Gettng NEE 136 4 5 9 Protocol VLAN Port Seting sssini keni aeaaaee ened dae huiednacuica tees cued EDELA EARR aa 137 BS OS PR NING EEN 139 AN GYRFF ON o N EE 141 EN KE VLAN E 143 45 13 GVRP Ee 143 4 5 14 VLAN Setting Example EE 146 4 5 14 1 Two Separate 802 1
130. crease security A group of network users assigned to a VLAN form a broadcast domain that is separate from other VLANs configured on the switch Packets are forwarded only between ports that are designated for the same VLAN Untagged VLANs can be used to manually isolate user groups or subnets 126 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 5 3 Management VLAN Configure Management VLAN on this page The screens in Figure 4 5 1 amp Figure 4 5 2 appear Management VLAN Setting Management VLAN Setting Detault 1 Figure 4 5 1 Management VLAN Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Management VLAN Provide the managed VLAN ID Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Management VLAN State Config Name Config Value Management VLAN Figure 4 5 2 Management VLAN State Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Management VLAN Display the current management VLAN 127 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 5 4 Create VLAN Create delete VLAN on this page The screens in Figure 4 5 3 amp Figure 4 5 4 appear Create VLAN VLAN Name Pr Figure 4 5 3 VLAN Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN List Indicates the ID of this particular VLAN e VLAN Action Th
131. critical to the timely startup of LLDP and therefore integral to the rapid availability of Emergency Call Service 317 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST Buttons Appl HEH Click to apply changes LLDP Global Config Config Name Config Value LLOP POW Disable Action Flooding Figure 4 12 2 LLDP Global Config Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e LLDP Enable Display the current LLDP status e LLDP PDU Disable Display the current LLDP PDU disable action Action e Transmission Interval Display the current transmission interval e Holdtime Multiplier Display the current holdtime multiplier e Reinitialization Delay Display the current reinitialization delay e Transmit Delay Display the current transmit delay e LLDP MED Fast Start Display the current LLDP MED Fast Start Repeat Count Repeat Count 318 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 12 3 LLDP Port Setting Use the LLDP Port Setting to specify the message attributes for individual interfaces including whether messages are transmitted received or both transmitted and received The LLDP Port Configuration and Status screens in Figure 4 12 3 amp Figure 4 12 4 appear LLDP Port Configuration Port Select ostate Apply Optional TLVs Selection Port Select Optional TLV Select Select Optional TLVs M Apply Figure 4 12 3
132. d Web browser Telnet SNMP v1 v2c Firmware upgrade by HTTP TFTP protocol through Ethernet network Remote Local Syslog Basic Management Interfaces System log LLDP protocol SNTP Secure Management Interfaces SSH SSL SNMP v3 RFC 1213 MIB II RFC 1215 Generic Traps RFC 1493 Bridge MIB RFC 2674 Bridge MIB Extensions RFC 2737 Entity MIB Version 2 RFC 2819 RMON 1 2 3 9 RFC 2863 Interface Group MIB RFC 3635 Ethernet like MIB Standards Conformance Regulatory Compliance FCC Part 15 Class A CE IEEE 1901 Broadband Power Line IEEE 802 3 10BASE T IEEE 802 3u 100BASE TX 100BASE FX IEEE 802 3z Gigabit SX LX IEEE 802 3ab Gigabit 1000T IEEE 802 3x flow control and back pressure IEEE 802 3ad port trunk with LACP IEEE 802 1D Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Standards Compliance 22 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST IEEE 802 1p Class of Service IEEE 802 1Q VLAN tagging IEEE 802 1X Port Authentication Network Control IEEE 802 1ab LLDP RFC 768 UDP RFC 793 TFTP RFC 791 IP RFC 792 ICMP RFC 2068 HTTP RFC 1112 IGMP v1 RFC 2236 IGMP v2 RFC 3376 IGMP v3 RFC 2710 MLD v1 RFC 3810 MLD v2 Environment Operatin Temperature 40 75 degrees C 9 Relative Humidity 5 95 non condensing Storaae Temperature 40 85 degrees C j Relative Humidity 5 95
133. d Config screens in Figure 4 12 1 amp Figure 4 12 2 appear LLDP Global Setting Global Settings Enable Disable LLDP PDU Disable Action Filtering Bridging zs Flooding Transmission Interval a0 5 342767 Holdtime Multiplier 4 4 10 Reinitialization Delay 2 1 10 Transmit Delay A 1 6191 LLDP MED Fast Start Repeat Count 3 1 10 Apply Figure 4 12 1 Global Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Enable Globally enable or disable LLDP function e LLDP PDU Disable Set LLDP PDU disable action include Filtering Bridging and Flooding Action E Filtering discard all LLDP PDUs 316 PLANET Networking amp Communication e Transmission Interval e Holdtime Multiplier e Reinitialization Delay e Transmit Delay e LLDP MED Fast Start Repeat Count User s Manual of LRP 422CST E Bridging transmit LLDP PDU in the same VLAN E Flooding transmit LLDP PDU for all port The switch is periodically transmitting LLDP frames to its neighbors for having the network discovery information up to date The interval between each LLDP frame is determined by the Transmission Interval value Valid values are restricted to 5 32768 seconds Default 30 seconds This attribute must comply with the following rule Transmission Interval Hold Time Multiplier lt 65536 and Transmission Interval gt 4 Delay Interval Each LLDP frame c
134. d correctly Check whether the AC power source is working by connecting a different device in place of the switch 366 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 If that device works refer to the next step 5 If that device does not work check the AC power 367 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST APPENDIX A A 1 Switch s RJ45 Pin Assignments 1000Mbps 1000BASE T 1 BI_DA BI_DB 2 BI_DA BI_DB 3 BI_DB BI_DA 4 BI_DC BI_DD 5 BI_DC BI_DD 6 BI_DB BI_DA 7 BI_DD BI_DC 8 BI_DD BI_DC Implicit implementation of the crossover function within a twisted pair cable or at a wiring panel while not expressly forbidden is beyond the scope of this standard A 2 10 100Mbps 10 100BASE TX When connecting your 10 100Mbps Ethernet Switch to another switch a bridge or a hub a straight through or crossover cable is necessary Each port of the Switch supports auto MDI MDI X detection That means you can directly connect the Switch to any Ethernet devices without making a crossover cable The following table and diagram show the standard RJ45 receptacle connector and their pin assignments RJ45 Connector Pin Assignment Contact MDI MDI X Media Dependent Interface Media Dependent Interface Cross The standard cable RJ45 pin assignment 368 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST The stand
135. d on the LRP Managed Switch please refer to DIN rail Mounting section for DIN rail installation If users want to wall mount the LRP Managed Switch please refer to the Wall Mount Plate Mounting section for wall mount plate installation To hang the LRP Managed Switch on the DIN rail track or wall Power on the LRP Managed Switch Please refer to the Wiring the Power Inputs section for knowing the information about how to wire the power The power LED on the LRP Managed Switch will light up Please refer to the LED Indicators section for indication of LED lights Prepare the twisted pair straight through Category 5 cable for Ethernet connection Insert one side of RJ45 cable category 5 into the LRP Managed Switch Ethernet port RJ45 port while the other side to the network device s Ethernet port RJ45 port e g Switch PC or Server The UTP port RJ45 LED on the LRP Managed Switch will light up when the cable is connected with the network device Please refer to the LED Indicators section for LED light indication gf Make sure that the connected network devices support MDI MDI X If it does not support Geet i use the crossover Category 5 cable Note 7 When all connections are set and all LED lights show normal the installation is completed 30 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 2 2 2 DIN rail Mounting This section describes how to install the LRP Managed Switch There are tw
136. d the default path cost recommended by the IEEE 8021w standard exceeds 65 535 the default is set to Port Type IEEE 802 1D 1998 IEEE 802 1w 2001 50 600 200 000 20 000 000 65 535 10 60 20 000 2 000 000 Gigabit Ethernet 2000 200 000 Table 4 6 1 Recommended STP Path Cost Range 161 PLANET Networking amp Communication Port Type CIST Port Status Link Type Half Duplex Full Duplex Trunk Half Duplex Full Duplex Trunk Full Duplex Trunk IEEE 802 1D 1998 User s Manual of LRP 422CST IEEE 802 1w 2001 2 000 000 1 999 999 1 000 000 200 000 100 000 50 000 Table 4 6 2 Recommended STP Path Costs Port Type Link Type IEEE 802 1w 2001 Half Duplex Full Duplex Trunk Half Duplex Full Duplex Trunk Full Duplex Trunk 2 000 000 1 000 000 500 000 200 000 100 000 50 000 Table 4 6 3 Default STP Path Costs LAG1 LAG LAG4 Gei e Figure 4 6 7 STP Port Status Page Screenshot 162 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical STP port e Admin Enable Display the current STP port mode status e External Cost Display the current external cost e Edge Port Display the current edge port status e BPDU Filter Display the current BPDU filter configuration e BPDU Guard Display the current BPDU guard configuration e P2P MAC Display the c
137. d to the LAN on which the packet is transmitted will receive the BPDU BPDUs are not directly forwarded by the switch but the receiving switch uses the information in the frame to calculate a BPDU and if the topology changes initiates a BPDU transmission The communication between switches via BPDUs results in the following a One switch is elected as the root switch E The shortest distance to the root switch is calculated for each switch E A designated switch is selected This is the switch closest to the root switch through which packets will be forwarded to the root a A port for each switch is selected This is the port providing the best path from the switch to the root switch a Ports included in the STP are selected Creating a Stable STP Topology It is to make the root port a fastest link If all switches have STP enabled with default settings the switch with the lowest MAC address in the network will become the root switch By increasing the priority lowering the priority number of the best switch STP can be forced to select the best switch as the root switch When STP is enabled using the default parameters the path between source and destination stations in a switched network might not be ideal For instance connecting higher speed links to a port that has a higher number than the current root port can cause a root port change STP Port States The BPDUs take some time to pass through a network This propagation delay can
138. ddress and switch ports The frames also contain a MAC address SMAC address which shows the MAC address of the equipment sending the frame The SMAC address is used by the switch to automatically update the MAC table with these dynamic MAC addresses Dynamic entries are removed from the MAC table if no frame with the corresponding SMAC address has been seen after a configurable age time 4 11 1 Static MAC Setting The static entries in the MAC table are shown in this table The MAC table is sorted first by VLAN ID and then by MAC address The Static MAC Setting screens in Figure 4 11 1 amp Figure 4 11 2 appear static MAC static MAC Setting Add Figure 4 11 1 Statics MAC Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e MAC Address Physical address associated with this interface e VLAN Select VLAN from this drop down list e Port Select port from this drop down list Buttons Add Click to add new static MAC address 311 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST Static MAC Status MAC Address VLAN Port Delete 00 30 4F 14 00 01 Default t feru o Figure 4 11 2 Statics MAC Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e No This is the number for entries e MAC Address The MAC address for the entry e VLAN The VLAN ID for the entry e Port Display the current port ge Delete Click to delete
139. des are Static Enable NTP mode operation When enabling NTP mode operation the agent forwards and transfers NTP messages between the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain DHCP Enable DHCP client mode operation Enable the DHCP client by checking this box If DHCP fails and the configured IP address is zero DHCP will retry If DHCP fails and the configured IP address is non zero DHCP will stop and the configured IP settings will be used The DHCP client will announce the configured System Name as hostname to provide DNS lookup e IP Address Provide the IP address of this switch in dotted decimal notation e Subnet Mask Provide the subnet mask of this switch in dotted decimal notation e Gateway Provide the IP address of the router in dotted decimal notation e DNS Server 1 2 Provide the IP address of the DNS Server in dotted decimal notation Buttons Apply Click to apply changes IP Information Information Name Information Value Static IP Address 192 168 0 100 Static Subnet Mask Static DNS Server 1 Static DNS Server 2 Figure 4 2 3 IP Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields 59 PLANET Networking amp Communication Object e DHCP State e IP Address e Subnet Mask e Gateway e DNS Server 1 2 4 2 3 IPv6 Configuration User s Manual of LRP 422CST Description Display the current DHCP state Display the current IP address Display the curr
140. different VLAN This LRP Managed Switch supports the following VLAN features E Up to 255 VLANs based on the IEEE 802 1Q standard E Port overlapping allowing a port to participate in multiple VLANs E End stations can belong to multiple VLANs E Passing traffic between VLAN aware and VLAN unaware devices 123 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST WW IEEE 802 1Q Standard IEEE 802 1Q tagged VLAN are implemented on the Switch 802 1Q VLAN require tagging which enables them to span the entire network assuming all switches on the network are IEEE 802 1Q compliant VLAN allow a network to be segmented in order to reduce the size of broadcast domains All packets entering a VLAN will only be forwarded to the stations over IEEE 802 1Q enabled switches that are members of that VLAN and this includes broadcast multicast and unicast packets from unknown sources VLAN can also provide a level of security to your network IEEE 802 1Q VLAN will only deliver packets between stations that are members of the VLAN Any port can be configured as either tagging or untagging m The untagging feature of IEEE 802 1Q VLAN allows VLAN to work with legacy switches that don t recognize VLAN tags in packet headers m The tagging feature allows VLAN to span multiple 802 1Q compliant switches through a single physical connection and allows Spanning Tree to be enabled on all ports and work normally Some rele
141. ds 253 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST Object Description e HTTP Service Display the current HTTP service e Login Authentication List Display the current login authentication list e Session Timeout Display the current session timeout 4 9 5 5 HTTPs The HTTPs Settings and Information screens in Figure 4 9 29 amp Figure 4 9 30 appear HTTPS Settings HTTPS Settings HTTPS Service Enable zs Disable Login Authentication List Default session Timeout 10 0 866400 minutes Apply Figure 4 9 29 HTTPs Settings Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e HTTPs Service Disable or enable HTTPs service e Login Authentication List Select login authentication list from this drop down list e Session Timeout Set the session timeout value Buttons Apply Click to apply changes 254 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST HTTPS Information Information Name Information Value HTTPS Service Disabled Figure 4 9 30 HTTPs Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e HTTPs Service Display the current HTTPs service e Login Authentication List Display the current login authentication list e Session Timeout Display the current session timeout 4 9 6 Management Access Method 4 9 6 1 Profile Rules The Profile Rule Table Setting and Table scre
142. e IP address filter you can enter a specific source IP address The legal format is XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX A frame that hits this ACE matches this source IP address value When User Defined is selected for the source IP filter you can enter a specific SIP prefix length in dotted decimal notation Specify the Destination IP address filter for this ACE E Any No destination IP address filter is specified WR User Defined If you want to filter a specific destination IP address with this ACE choose this value A field for entering a source IP address value appears When User Defined is selected for the destination IP address filter you can enter a specific destination IP address The legal format is XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX A frame that hits this ACE matches this destination IP address value When User Defined is selected for the destination IP filter you can enter a specific DIP prefix length in dotted decimal notation Specify the source port for this ACE mM Any No specific source port is specified source port status is don t care M Single If you want to filter a specific source port with this ACE you can enter a specific source port value A field for entering a source port value appears The allowed range is 0 to 65535 A frame that hits this ACE 305 e PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST matches this source port value Ra
143. e LRP Managed Switch and all its ports or monitor network conditions Via the Web Management the administrator can set up the LRP Managed Switch by selecting the functions those listed in the Main Function The screen in Figure 4 1 5 appears Figure 4 1 5 LRP Managed Switch Main Functions Menu Buttons Click to save changes or reset to default LOGOUT Click to logout the LRP Managed Switch REBOOT Click to reboot the LRP Managed Switch ment Click to refresh the page 53 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 1 1 Save Button This save button allows save the running startup backup configuration or reset switch in default parameter The screen in Figure 4 1 6 appears SAVE LOGOUT REBOOT REFRESH E Restore to Defaults Figure 4 1 6 Save Button Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Save Configuration to Click to save the configuration For more detailed information please refer to FLASH chapter 4 1 2 e Restore to Default Click to reset switch in default parameter For more detailed information please refer to chapter 4 15 1 4 1 2 Configuration Manager The system file folder contains configuration settings The screen in Figure 4 1 7 appears save Configuration Running configuration Source File Startup configuration Backup configuration Startup configuration Backup configuration Des
144. e PoE Budget LRP 422CST 150 watts Motworking amp Communication out e eee k SAVE LOGOUT REBOOT REFRESH LRP 422CST PoE Configuration Port Management Link Aggregation v PoE Configuration VLAN z System PoE Admin Mode Disable S PoE Manage ment Mode Consumption Temperature Threshold 68 Degrees C PoE Temperature PCY 125 F Power Budget a Power Allocation PoE Mode Schedule SE eee fe me PoE Configuration PoE Schedule PD Alive Check i 36 Maintenance Figure 4 16 1 Power over Ethernet Status 350 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 15 1 Long Reach Power over Ethernet Powered Device Long Reach Power over Ethernet Extenders Enterprise can extend IP Ethernet transmission and inject power over an P existing coaxial cable for distance up to 1000m 3280ft to PoE IP camera 36 watts max PoE wireless AP and any 802 3af at complied powered device PD Approved PLANET Long Reach PoE Extenders The following list of approved PLANET Long Reach PoE extenders is correct at the time of publication Long Reach Ethernet Coaxial Extenders E LRP 101CE 1 Port 10 100TX PoE PSE 1 Port Coax Long Reach PoE Extender It is recommended to use PLANET Long Reach Ethernet coaxial extenders on the LRP Managed Switch If you insert a coaxial extender that is not supported the LRP Managed Switch may
145. e Timer Forward Delay Timer User s Manual of LRP 422CST Description A combination of the User set priority and the switch s MAC address The Bridge Identifier consists of two parts a 16 bit priority and a 48 bit Ethernet MAC address 32768 MAC A relative priority for each switch lower numbers give a higher priority and a greater chance of a given switch being elected as the root bridge The length of time between broadcasts of the hello message by the switch Measures the age of a received BPDU for a port and ensures that the BPDU is discarded when its age exceeds the value of the maximum age timer The amount time spent by a port in the learning and listening states waiting for a BPDU that may return the port to the blocking state The following are the user configurable STP parameters for the port or port group level Variable Description Default Value Port Priority A relative priority for each 128 port lower numbers give a higher priority and a greater chance of a given port being elected as the root port Port Cost A value used by STP to evaluate paths STP calculates path costs and selects the path with the minimum cost as the active path 0 Auto Default Spanning Tree Configuration Feature Default Value Enable state STP disabled for all ports Port priority 128 Port cost 0 Bridge priority 32 68 User Changeable STA Parameters Default Value 32768 MAC 32768 2 seconds
146. e entry is a static or dynamic entry e Port The ports that are members of the entry Buttons Add to Static MAC table Click to add dynamic MAC address to static MAC address 315 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 12 LLDP 4 12 1 Link Layer Discovery Protocol Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP is used to discover basic information about neighboring devices on the local broadcast domain LLDP is a Layer 2 protocol that uses periodic broadcasts to advertise information about the sending device Advertised information is represented in Type Length Value TLV format according to the IEEE 802 1ab standard and can include details such as device identification capabilities and configuration settings LLDP also defines how to store and maintain information gathered about the neighboring network nodes it discovers Link Layer Discovery Protocol Media Endpoint Discovery LLDP MED is an extension of LLDP intended for managing endpoint devices such as Voice over IP phones and network switches The LLDP MED TLVs advertise information such as network policy power inventory and device location details LLDP and LLDP MED information can be used by SNMP applications to simplify troubleshooting enhance network management and maintain an accurate network topology 4 12 2 LLDP Global Setting This page allows the user to inspect and configure the current LLDP port settings The LLDP Global Setting an
147. e other ports except the port which this packet comes in And these ports will transmit this packet to the network it connected If found and the destination address is located at a different port from this packet comes in the Ethernet Switching will forward this packet to the port where this destination address is located according to the information from the address table But if the destination address is located at the same port with this packet then this packet will be filtered thereby increasing the network throughput and availability 5 4 Store and Forward Store and Forward is one type of packet forwarding techniques A Store and Forward Ethernet Switching stores the incoming frame in an internal buffer and does the complete error checking before transmission Therefore no error packets occur It is the best choice when a network needs efficiency and stability The Ethernet Switch scans the destination address from the packet header searches the routing table provided for the incoming port and forwards the packet only if required The fast forwarding makes the switch attractive for connecting servers directly to the network thereby increasing throughput and availability However the switch is most commonly used to segment existence hubs which nearly always improves the overall performance An Ethernet Switching can be easily configured in any Ethernet network environment to significantly boost bandwidth using the conventional cablin
148. e sent as is to multicast capable routers The default is enabled Buttons Appl PPly Click to apply changes IGMP Snooping Informations Information Name Information Value IGMP Snooping Status IGMP Snooping Version IGMP Snooping V2 Report Suppression Enable Figure 4 7 8 IGMP Snooping Information Page Screenshot 178 PLANET Networking amp Communication The page includes the following fields Object IGMP Snooping Status IGMP Snooping Version IGMP Snooping V2 Report Suppression User s Manual of LRP 422CST Description Display the current IGMP snooping status Display the current IGMP snooping version Display the current IGMP snooping v2 report suppression IGMP Snooping Table VLAN Snooping Ports Query ID Operation Auto Last Member Member Query Interval sec Query Max Response Interval sec Immediate Leave o eme fee e eo e oo fee fee Figure 4 7 9 IGMP Snooping Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Entry No VLAN ID IGMP Snooping Operation Status Router Ports Auto Learn Query Robustness Query Interval sec Query Max Response Interval sec Last Member Query count Last Member Query Interval sec Immediate Leave Modify Description Display the current entry number Display the current VLAN ID Display the current IGMP snooping operation status Display the current router ports auto l
149. e with a new user name and password the screens in Figure 4 2 6 amp Figure 4 2 7 appear Local User Information New User a Tl TN Figure 4 2 6 Local User Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Username The name identifying the user Maximum length 32 characters Maximum number of users 8 e Password Type The password type for the user e Password Enter the user s new password here Range 0 32 characters plain text case sensitive e Retype Password Please enter the user s new password here again to confirm e Privilege Type The privilege type for the user Options e Admin e User e Other Buttons Apply Click to apply changes UserName Password Type Privilege Type Privilege Value Figure 4 2 7 Local User Page Screenshot 62 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST The page includes the following fields Object Description e Username Display the current username e Password Type Display the current password type e Privilege Type Display the current privilege type e Modify Click to modify the local user entry Delete Delete the current user 4 2 5 Time Settings 4 2 5 1 System Time Configure SNTP on this page SNTP is an acronym for Simple Network Time Protocol a network protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems You can specify SNTP Servers and set GMT Time zone The SNTP Con
150. ear Jumbo Frame Jumbo Frame Setting 10000 1518 10000 Figure 4 3 11 Jumbo Frame Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Jumbo Frame Bytes Enter the maximum frame size allowed for the switch port including FCS The allowed range is 1518 bytes to 10000 bytes 100 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST Buttons Appl HE Click to apply changes Jumbo Frame Config Information Name Information Value Jumbo Frame Bytes Figure 4 3 12 Jumbo Frame Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Jumbo Display the current maximum frame size Jumbo Frame is available for GE1 GE4 only 101 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 3 7 Port Error Disabled Configuration This page provides to set port error disable function The Port Error Disable Configuration screens in Figure 4 3 13 amp Figure 4 3 14 appear Error Disabled Settings Error Disabled Recovery Seconds Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Enable Disable Figure 4 3 13 Error Disabled Recovery Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e Recovery Interval e BPDU Guard e Self Loop e Broadcast Flood e Unknown Multicast Flood e Unicast Flood
151. earning Display the current query robustness Display the current query interval Display the current query max response interval Display the current last member query count Display the current last member query interval Display the current immediate leave Edit Click to edit parameter 179 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 7 2 2 IGMP Querier Setting This page provides IGMP Querier Setting The IGMP Querier Setting screens in Figure 4 7 10 amp Figure 4 7 11 appear IGMP Querier Setting VLAN ID Querier State Querier Version Select VLANs Disable Enable Apply Figure 4 7 10 IGMP VLAN Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID Select VLAN ID from this drop down list e Querier State Enable or disable the querier state The default value is Disabled e Querier Version Sets the querier version for compatibility with other devices on the network Version 2 or 3 Default 2 Buttons Apply Click to apply changes IGMP Querter Status Disable s Figure 4 7 11 IGMP Querier Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID Display the current VLAN ID e Querier State Display the current querier state e Querier Status Display the current querier status e Querier Version Display the current querier version e Querier IP Display the current queri
152. eatures e Accounting for IEEE 802 1X authenticated users that access the network through the LRP Managed Switch e Accounting for users that access management interfaces on the LRP Managed Switch through the console and Telnet e Accounting for commands that users enter at specific CLI privilege levels Authorization of users that access management interfaces on the LRP Managed Switch through the console and Telnet To configure AAA on the LRP Managed Switch you need to follow this general process 1 Configure RADIUS and TACACS server access parameters See Configuring Local Remote Logon Authentication 2 Define RADIUS and TACACS server groups to support the accounting and authorization of services 3 Define a method name for each service to which you want to apply accounting or authorization and specify the RADIUS or TACACS server groups to use Apply the method names to port or line interfaces This guide assumes that RADIUS and TACACS servers have already been configured to support AAA The configuration of RADIUS and TACACS server software is beyond the scope of this guide Refer to the documentation provided with the RADIUS or TACACS server software 244 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 9 4 1 Login List This page is to login list parameters The authentication list screens in Figure 4 9 17 amp Figure 4 9 18 appear Se Authentication e List Name Method 1 Method 2
153. ec E 5sec m 10sec e IFG Allow user to enable or disable this function 97 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 3 5 Port Mirroring Configure port Mirroring on this page This function provides monitoring of network traffic that forwards a copy of each incoming or outgoing packet from one port of a network switch to another port where the packet can be studied It enables the manager to keep close track of switch performance and alter it if necessary e To debug network problems selected traffic can be copied or mirrored to a mirror port where a frame analyzer can be attached to analyze the frame flow e The LRP Managed Switch can unobtrusively mirror traffic from any port to a monitor port You can then attach a protocol analyzer or RMON probe to this port to perform traffic analysis and verify connection integrity Port Mirror Application Port Mirroring Tx 101010 y j K A 0 0 Rx 111000 Rx 111000 Monitor Client With Ethereal or Sniffer Pro Figure 4 3 8 Port Mirror Application The traffic to be copied to the mirror port is selected as follows e All frames received on a given port also known as ingress or source mirroring e All frames transmitted on a given port also known as egress or destination mirroring Mirror Port Configuration The Port Mirror Configuration screens in Figure 4 3 9 amp Figure 4 3 10 appear 98 PLANET Networking amp C
154. ecify the TCP Push Function PSH value for this ACE E Set TCP frames where the PSH field is set must be able to match this entry E Unset TCP frames where the PSH field is set must not be able to match this entry Don t Care Any value is allowed don t care RST M Specify the TCP Reset the connection RST value for this ACE Set TCP frames where the RST field is set must be able to match this entry E Unset TCP frames where the RST field is set must not be able to match this entry WR Don t Care Any value is allowed don t care SYN Specify the TCP Synchronize sequence numbers SYN value for this ACE 300 vi Buttons Add PLANET Networking amp Communication e Type of Service e ICMP e ICMP Code Click to add ACE list FIN User s Manual of LRP 422CST E Set TCP frames where the SYN field is set must be able to match this entry E Unset TCP frames where the SYN field is set must not be able to match this entry WR Don t Care Any value is allowed don t care Specify the TCP No more data from sender FIN value for this ACE E Set TCP frames where the FIN field is set must be able to match this entry E Unset TCP frames where the FIN field is set must not be able to match this entry WR Don t Care Any value is allowed don t care Specify the type of service for this ACE Any No specific type of service is specified destination port status is don
155. ect port from this drop down list Enable or disable the port security The maximum number of MAC addresses that can be secured on this port If the limit is exceeded the corresponding action is taken The switch is born with a total number of MAC addresses from which all ports draw whenever a new MAC address is seen on a Port Security enabled port Since all ports draw from the same pool it may happen that a configured maximum cannot be granted if the remaining ports have already used all available MAC addresses If Limit is reached the switch can take one of the following actions E Forward Do not allow more than Limit MAC addresses on the port but take no further action E Shutdown If Limit 1 MAC addresses is seen on the port shut down the port This implies that all secured MAC addresses will be removed from the port and no new will be learned Even if the link is physically disconnected and reconnected on the port by disconnecting the cable the port will 283 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST remain shut down There are three ways to re open the port 1 Disable and re enable Limit Control on the port or the switch 2 Click the Reopen button E Discard If Limit 1 MAC addresses is seen on the port it will trigger the action that do not learn the new MAC and drop the package Buttons Appl HEH Click to apply changes Port Security Status Port Name Enab
156. ed Ports Overview When a switch port is configured to be a member of protected group also called Private VLAN communication between protected ports within that group can be prevented Two application examples are provided in this section e Customers connected to an ISP can be members of the protected group but they are not allowed to communicate with each other within that VLAN e Servers in a farm of web servers in a Demilitarized Zone DMZ are allowed to communicate with the outside world and with database servers on the inside segment but are not allowed to communicate with each other 104 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST Be Feet bi Internet 5 Promiscuous Public Servers Promiscuous Access Denied Access Denied Access Denied Private VLAN For protected port group to be applied the LRP Managed Switch must first be configured for standard VLAN operation Ports in a protected port group fall into one of these two groups a Promiscuous Unprotected ports Ports from which traffic can be forwarded to all ports in the private VLAN Ports which can receive traffic from all ports in the private VLAN a Isolated Protected ports Ports from which traffic can only be forwarded to promiscuous ports in the private VLAN Ports which can receive traffic from only promiscuous ports in the private VLAN The configuration of promiscuous and isolated ports ap
157. ed on this page There is an unknown unicast storm rate control unknown multicast storm rate control and a broadcast storm rate control These only affect flooded frames i e frames with a VLAN ID DMAC pair not present on the MAC Address table 4 9 12 1 Global Setting The Storm Control Global Setting and Information screens in Figure 4 9 71 amp Figure 4 9 72 appear Storm Control Global storm Control Global Setting Unit nos bps Preamble amp IFG Excluded Included Apply Figure 4 9 71 Storm Control Global Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Unit Controls the unit of measure for the storm control rate as pps or bps The default value is bps e Preamble amp IFG Set the excluded or included interframe gap Buttons Appl PPY Click to apply changes Storm Control Global Information Information Name Information Value Preamble amp IFG Excluded Figure 4 9 72 Storm Control Global Information Page Screenshot 290 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST The page includes the following fields Object Description e Unit Display the current unit e Preamble amp IFG Display the current preamble amp IFG 4 9 12 2 Port Setting Storm control for the switch is configured on this page There are three types of storm rate control a Broadcast storm rate control E Unknown Unicast storm rate
158. ed to the VID of the port that is to transmit the packet If the two VID are different the switch will drop the packet Because of the existence of the PVID for untagged packets and the VID for tagged packets tag aware and tag unaware network devices can coexist on the same network A switch port can have only one PVID but can have as many VID as the switch has memory in its VLAN table to store them Because some devices on a network may be tag unaware a decision must be made at each port on a tag aware device before packets are transmitted should the packet to be transmitted have a tag or not If the transmitting port is connected to a tag unaware device the packet should be untagged If the transmitting port is connected to a tag aware device the packet should be tagged WW Default VLANs The Switch initially configures one VLAN VID 1 called default The factory default setting assigns all ports on the Switch to the default As new VLAN are configured in Port based mode their respective member ports are removed from the default 125 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST DW Assigning Ports to VLANs Before enabling VLANs for the switch you must first assign each port to the VLAN group s in which it will participate By default all ports are assigned to VLAN 1 as untagged ports Add a port as a tagged port if you want it to carry traffic for one or more VLANs and any intermediate ne
159. eeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeesseeeeeseeeeeas 36 2 2 6 Installing the Long Reach PoE Commumnicaton 40 3 SWITCH MANAGEMENT ccccccseccseeceneecnseceessenseonseceeseeneeonsecenssonseoaseoesssonseonseoeeesens 44 SF RO CUP ONIONS norinni Ea a E i 44 3 2 Management Access e TTT 45 3 3 ee le d e ue at EE 46 gA We D Manage Ment eseisma aaa a aaa EEE R H SOA Aa RAEE a RS 47 3 5 SNMP based Network Management cceeeeeeccsssseseeeeeeeeccenssneeeeeeeeeoeaaeeeeeeeeeoeanssseeeeseeeoonsneaeeesssenes 48 3 6 PLANET Smart Discovery VUNINY egteeeegegb eege Een 48 4 NEEN EE EEEEEEEERREEeCE 50 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST PED INANE WeD ACC E 52 e Ns 1255 AV SOON EE 54 41 2 Coniguration Manage 0 oe cics acs ctesen Seeee nee Ee ra A E AEA AE ara A ESE ERA Aa aaa 54 41 21 SAVING BE ei le UI e E 55 Dy SN EN 57 4 2 1 System Information eee 57 EA Eo E a A bo eee eee eee AE E A E E eee ee eee E EN A EEEE 58 E ee ION EN 60 4 2 4 User CGontouraton ee ee cess eee ee eee e eee a eee ee eae eee AA eEeEA OE EEESA SE EEEA GAS EES Gas SeEEsGa aS Eetsaaeeesaaaeeesaaeeeesaaeeeeas 62 4 2 5 Time Gettmngs EEN 63 e SEET 63 4 2 5 2 SNTP Server Settings saiscy sete is tas soe ences atcn user onside eech ceed evi tig a eotes deb ends fa Riceadaveetee dates cacendetoeenddeencoadeeeeoeee 66 A2 6 Log WAN AO SINC 6 tineatnacieressiataecthicnergnetieiaenectensgnenoer thease dial Mesatbimnehenithbenibea
160. elds Object Description e ACL Name Create a name from IPv4 based ACL list Buttons Add l Click to add ACL name list ACL Table Figure 4 10 6 ACL Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Click Delete to delete ACL name entry 297 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 10 4 IPv4 based ACE An ACE consists of several parameters Different parameter options are displayed depending on the frame type that you select The IPv4 based ACE screens in Figure 4 10 7 amp Figure 4 10 8 appear IPv4 Based ACE IPv4 Based ACE sd Range 1 2147483647 1 is first processed Permit O Deny O Shutdown Any IP O Select from list Any O User Defined OoOo 15 for matching 0s for no matching E Any User Defined sd 1s for matching Os for no matching Any single D Range 0 65535 Range 0 eem Range 0 65535 Any Single Range 0 65535 0 Range 0 65535 Range Range 0 65535 0 65535 Range 0 65535 Urg Get Unset Don t Care Ack Set Unset Don t Care Psh set Unset Don t Care Hat Get V Unset Y Don t Care oyn Set Unset Don t Care Fin Set Unset Don t Care E Any ODSCPtomatchO Range 0 63 OIP Precedence tomatchO Banne 0 7 Any select trom list Echo Her Protocol ID
161. elds Object Description e Port Display the current port e VLAN Display the current VLAN e Circuit ID Display the current circuit ID 271 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 9 8 Dynamic ARP Inspection Dynamic ARP Inspection DAI is a secure feature Several types of attacks can be launched against a host or devices connected to Layer 2 networks by poisoning the ARP caches This feature is used to block such attacks Only valid ARP requests and responses can go through DUT This page provides ARP Inspection related configuration A Dynamic ARP prevents the untrusted ARP packets based on the DHCP Snooping Database 4 9 8 1 Global Setting DAI Setting and Information screens in Figure 4 9 52 amp Figure 4 9 53 appear DAI Setting DAI Setting Enable sz Disable Apply Figure 4 9 52 DAI Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e DA Enable the Global Dynamic ARP Inspection or disable the Global ARP Inspection Buttons Apply Click to apply changes DAI Informations a CT Figure 4 9 53 DAI Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e DA Display the current DAI status 272 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 9 8 2 VLAN Setting DAI VLAN Setting screens in Figure 4 9 54 amp Figure 4 9 55 appear DAI VLAN Setting
162. elength Interface Operating Temp Model Speed Mbps Gigabit Ethernet Transceiver 1000BASE X SFP Model Speed Mbps See Fiber Mode Distance Wavelength nm Operating Temp weer 1000 Copper 100m Li 80 degrees c 0 60 degrees C 0 60 degrees C 0 60 degrees C MGB TLX Lc Gigabit Ethernet Transceiver 1000BASE BX Single Fiber Bi directional SFP Model Speed Mbps Se deer Fiber Mode Distance Wavelength TX Wavelength RX Operating Temp MGB LB60 3 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST It is recommended to use PLANET SFP on the LRP Managed Switch If you insert an SFP transceiver that is not supported the LRP Managed Switch will not recognize it In the installation steps below this Manual uses Gigabit SFP transceiver as an example However the steps for Fast Ethernet SFP transceiver are similar 1 Before we connect LRP Managed Switch to the other network device we have to make sure both sides of the SFP transceivers are with the same media type for example 1OOOBASE SX to 1000BASE SX 1000BASE LX to 1000BASE LX 2 Check whether the fiber optic cable type matches with the SFP transceiver requirement gt To connect to 1JOOOBASE SX SFP transceiver please use the multi mode fiber cable with one side being the male duplex LC connector type gt Toconnect to 1OOOBASE LX SFP transceiver please use the single mode fiber cable with
163. enable disable Long Reach PoE port power feeding priority Per Long Reach PoE port power limitation Long Reach PD alive check Long Reach PoE schedule Industrial Case Installation HM P30 aluminum case protection WW DIN rail and wall mount design Mi Redundant Power Design 48 to 56V DC redundant power with polarity reverse protect function Mi Supports 6000V DC Ethernet ESD protection Mi 40 to 75 degrees C operating temperature 17 PLANET Networking amp Communication Layer 2 Features User s Manual of LRP 422CST Mi Prevents packet loss with back pressure half duplex and IEEE 802 3x pause frame flow control full duplex WW High performance Store and Forward architecture broadcast storm control and runt CRC filtering that eliminates erroneous packets to optimize the network bandwidth Mi Supports VLAN IEEE 802 1Q tagged VLAN Provider Bridging VLAN Q in Q IEEE 802 1ad support Protocol VLAN Voice VLAN Private VLAN Management VLAN GVRP Mi Supports Spanning Tree Protocol STP Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol STP BPDU Guard BPDU Filtering and BPDU Forwarding Mi Supports Link Aggregation IEEE 802 3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP Cisco ether channel static trunk Maximum 4 trunk groups up to 4 ports per trunk group WW Provides port mirror many to 1 Mi
164. ens in Figure 4 4 12 amp Figure 4 4 13 appear LAG Status Re STATE Gel fe NorPresent ooo Gel f presen C _ norPresent gt ace norPresent The page includes the following fields Object e LAG e Name e Type e Link State e Active Member e Standby Member Figure 4 4 12 LAG Status Page Screenshot Description Display the current trunk entry Display the current LAG name Display the current trunk type Display the current link state Display the current active member Display the current standby member 119 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST LACP Information GE1 LAGI ooo000000000 03e8 03e8 DETACH DFLT FstPRD Figure 4 4 13 LACP Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Trunk Display the current trunk ID e Port Display the current port number e PartnerSysld The system ID of link partner This field would be updated when the port receives LACP PDU from link partner e PnKey Port key of partner This field would be updated when the port receives LACP PDU from link partner e AtKey Port key of actor The key is designed to be the same as trunk ID e Sel LACP selection logic status of the port E S means selected E U means unselected E D means standby e Mux LACP mux state machine status of the port E DETACH means the port is in detached state E WAIT means waiti
165. ens in Figure 4 9 31 amp Figure 4 9 32 appear Profile Rule Table Setting al Pv4iMask l EN v Permit v Select Ports M poon 2000 IPy6 P retix 0 0 0 0 Apply Figure 4 9 31 Profile Rule Table Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Access Profile Name Indicates the access profile name 1 32 characters e Priority 1 65535 Set priority The allowed value is from 1 to 65535 255 PLANET Networking amp Communication Buttons Apply Management Method Action Port IP Source Click to apply changes User s Manual of LRP 422CST Indicates the host can access the switch from HTTP HT TPs telnet SSH SNMPYAIl interface that the host IP address matched the entry An IP address can contain any combination of permit or deny rules Default Permit rules Sets the access mode of the profile either permit or deny Select port from this drop down list Indicates the IP address for the access management entry v Profile Rule Table Access Profile Name Priority Management Method Action Port Source IPv4 Source IPv4 Mask Source IPv6 Prefix Modify The page includes the following fields Object Access Profile Name Priority Management Method Action Port Source IPv4 Source IPv4 Mask Source IPv6 Source IPv6 Prefix Modify Figure 4 9 32 Profile Rule Table Page Screenshot Description Display
166. ent subnet mask Display the current gateway Display the current DNS server The IPv6 Configuration includes Auto Configuration IPv6 Address and Gateway The configured column is used to view or change the IPv6 configuration Fill out the Auto Configuration IPv6 Address and Gateway for the device The screens in Figure 4 2 4 amp Figure 4 2 5 appear IPv6 Address Setting Auto Configuration O Disable Enable een DHCPV6 Client Disable Enable Apply Figure 4 2 4 IPv6 Address Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e Auto Configuration e IPv6 Address Description Enable IPv6 auto configuration by checking this box If it fails the configured IPv6 address is zero The router may delay responding to a router solicitation for a few seconds the total time needed to complete auto configuration can be significantly longer Provide the IPv6 address of this switch IPv6 address is in 128 bit records represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separating each field For example fe80 215 c5ff fe03 4dc7 The symbol is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16 bit groups of contiguous zeros but it can only appear once It also uses the following legally IPv4 address For example 192 1 2 34 Provide the IPv6 Prefix of this switch The allowed range is 1 through 128 60 PLANET Ne
167. enter a specific destination MAC address The legal format is xx xx xx xx xx xx A frame that hits this ACE matches this DA MAC value Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their sender hardware address field SHA settings E Oo At frames where SHA is not equal to the DA MAC address E 1 ARP frames where SHA is equal to the DA MAC address Specify the source MAC filter for this ACE E Any No SA MAC filter is specified WR User Defined If you want to filter a specific source MAC address with this ACE choose this value A field for entering a SA MAC value appears When User Defined is selected for the SA MAC filter you can enter a specific source MAC address The legal format is xx xx xx xx xx xx A frame that hits this ACE matches this SA MAC value Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their sender hardware address field SHA settings E 0 ARP frames where SHA is not equal to the SA MAC address E 1 ARP frames where SHA is equal to the SA MAC address Indicates the ID of this particular VLAN Include or exclude the 802 1p value Set the 802 1p value E 0 where frame is not equal to the 802 1p value E 1 where frame is equal to the 802 1p value You can enter a specific EtherType value The allowed range is 0x05DD to OxFFFF A frame that hits this ACE matches this EtherType value 295 PLANET Networking amp Communication Buttons Add Click to add ACE list MAC
168. entication server Frames sent between the supplicant and the switch are special 802 1X frames known as EAPOL EAP Over LANs frames EAPOL frames encapsulate EAP PDUs RFC3748 Frames sent between the switch and the RADIUS server are RADIUS packets RADIUS packets also encapsulate EAP PDUs together with other attributes like the switch s IP address name and the supplicant s port number on the switch EAP is very flexible in that it allows for different authentication methods like MD5 Challenge PEAP and TLS The important thing is that the authenticator the switch doesn t need to know which authentication method the supplicant and the authentication server are using or how many information exchange frames are needed for a particular method The switch simply encapsulates the EAP part of the frame into the relevant type EAPOL or RADIUS and forwards it When authentication is complete the RADIUS server sends a special packet containing a success or failure indication Besides forwarding this decision to the supplicant the switch uses it to open up or block traffic on the switch port connected to the supplicant Overview of User Authentication It is allowed to configure the LRP Managed Switch to authenticate users logging into the system for management access using local or remote authentication methods such as Telnet and Web browser This LRP Managed Switch provides secure network management access using the following options m Remote
169. er Gigabit Port LNK ACT Green 1000 Orange Dimensions W x D x H 107 x 72 x 152 mm 1 150g Power Requirements 48 to 56V DC 9 5 watts 32 42 BTU System on Power Consumption l 156 watts 532 30 BTU Full loading Layer 2 Functions TX RX both Many to 1 monitor 802 1Q tagged based VLAN Up to 256 VLAN groups out of 4094 VLAN IDs 802 1ad Q in Q tunneling Voice VLAN Protocol VLAN Private VLAN Protected port GVRP Port Mirroring VLAN IEEE 802 3ad LACP and static trunk Link Aggregation Supports 4 trunk groups with 4 ports for each group Spanning Tree Protocol STP RSTP MSTP IGMP v2 v3 Snooping E IGMP Querier 21 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST Up to 256 multicast groups MLD Snooping MLD v1 v2 Snooping up to 256 multicast groups Access Control List IPv4 IPv6 IP based ACL MAC based ACL 8 mapping IDs to 8 level priority queues Port number 802 1p priority 802 1Q VLAN tag DSCP field in IP packet Traffic classification based strict priority and WRR IEEE 802 1X port based authentication Security Built in RADIUS client to co operate with RADIUS server Management Functions RADIUS TACACS user access authentication IP MAC port binding MAC filter Static MAC address DHCP Snooping and DHCP Option82 STP BPDU guard BPDU filtering and BPDU forwarding DoS attack prevention ARP inspection IP source guar
170. er IP 180 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 7 2 3 IGMP Static Group Multicast filtering can be dynamically configured using IGMP Snooping and IGMP Query messages as described in above sections For certain applications that require tighter control you may need to statically configure a multicast service on the LRP Managed Switch First add all the ports attached to participating hosts to a common VLAN and then assign the multicast service to that VLAN group Static multicast addresses are never aged out When a multicast address is assigned to an interface in a specific VLAN the corresponding traffic can only be forwarded to ports within that VLAN The IGMP Static Group configuration screens in Figure 4 7 12 amp Figure 4 7 13 appear Add IGMP Static Group Group IP Address Member Ports Add Figure 4 7 12 Add IGMP Static Group Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID Select VLAN ID from this drop down list e Group IP Address The IP address for a specific multicast service e Member Ports Select port number from this drop down list Buttons Add Click to add IGMP router port entry IGMP Static Groups VLAN ID Group IP Address Modify Figure 4 7 13 IGMP Static Groups Page Screenshot 181 PLANET Networking amp Communication The page includes the following fields 4 7 2 4 IGMP Group Table VLAN
171. er you log on This management method is often preferred because you can remain connected and monitor the system during system reboots Also certain error messages are sent to the serial port regardless of the interface through which the associated action was initiated A Macintosh or PC attachment can use any terminal emulation program for connecting to the terminal serial port A workstation attachment under UNIX can use an emulator such as TIP 3 4 Web Management The LRP Managed Switch offers management features that allow users to manage the LRP Managed Switch from anywhere on the network through a standard browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer After you set up your IP address for the switch you can access the LRP Managed Switch s Web interface applications directly in your Web browser by entering the IP address of the LRP Managed Switch PC Workstation with Web Browser 192 168 0 x Managed Switch A Der RJ 45 UTP Cable IP Address 192 168 0 100 Figure 3 1 3 Web Management You can then use your Web browser to list and manage the LRP Managed Switch configuration parameters from one central location just as if you were directly connected to the LRP Managed Switch s console port Web Management requires either Microsoft Internet Explorer 8 0 or later Google Chrome Safari or Mozilla Firefox 1 5 or later R Ka GE2 op PLANET 0000 FEI FE2 FES FE4 op ep SAVE LOGOUT REBOOT REFRESH LRP 422CST Welcome
172. ers Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Options Global Setting Information Name Information Value Options Remote ID O30 4f af go Byte Format Figure 4 9 47 Option 82 Global Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Option 82 Remote ID Display the current option 82 remote ID 4 9 7 9 Option 82 Port Setting This function is used to set the retransmitting policy of the system for the received DHCP request message which contains option 82 The drop mode means that if the message has option 82 then the system will drop it without processing keep mode means that the system will keep the original option 82 segment in the message and forward it to the server to process replace mode means that the system will replace the option 82 segment in the existing message with its own option 82 and forward the message to the server to process Option 82 Port Setting screens in Figure 4 9 48 amp Figure 4 9 49 appear Options2 Port Setting Enable Allow UnTrusted Select Ports CEnable Disable Apply Figure 4 9 48 Option 82 Global Setting Page Screenshot 269 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select port from this drop down list e Enable Enable or disable option 82 function on port e Allow Untrusted Select modes from this drop down list The followi
173. ership Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Mode Display the current VLAN mode e Administrative VLANs Display the current administrative VLANs e Operational VLANs Display the current operational VLANs e Modif Edit Click to modify VLAN membership 135 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 5 8 Protocol VLAN Group Setting The network devices required to support multiple protocols cannot be easily grouped into a common VLAN This may require non standard devices to pass traffic between different VLANs in order to encompass all the devices participating in a specific protocol This kind of configuration deprives users of the basic benefits of VLANs including security and easy accessibility To avoid these problems you can configure this LRP Managed Switch with protocol based VLANs that divide the physical network into logical VLAN groups for each required protocol When a frame is received at a port its VLAN membership can then be determined based on the protocol type being used by the inbound packets Command Usage To configure protocol based VLANs follow these steps 1 First configure VLAN groups for the protocols you want to use Although not mandatory we suggest configuring a separate VLAN for each major protocol running on your network Do not add port members at this time 2 Crea
174. es in the range 1 to 30 a RADIUS request is retransmitted to a server that is not responding If the server has not responded after the last retransmit it is considered to be dead e Dead Time The Dead Time which can be set to a number between 0 and 3600 seconds is the period during which the switch will not send new requests to a server that has failed to respond to a previous request This will stop the switch from continually trying to contact a server that it has already determined as dead Setting the Dead Time to a value greater than 0 zero will enable this feature but only if more than one server has been configured e Key String The secret key up to 63 characters long shared between the RADIUS server and the switch Click to apply changes New Radius Server w m ID Address By Name 0 65535 D 62939 Use Defa at Use Defaut 0 1 30 secs Use Default 1 10 U 69935 Login 602 1 All Add Figure 4 9 11 New RADIUS Server Page Screenshot 239 PLANET Networking amp Communication The page includes the following fields Buttons Add Object Server Definition Server IP Authentication Port Acct Port Key String Timeout for Reply Retries Server Priority Dead Time Usage Type User s Manual of LRP 422CST Description Set the server definition Address of the RADIUS server IP name The UDP port to use on the R
175. et function for the LRP ports from WebUI 41 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST PoE Configuration Link Aggregation PoE Configuration VLAN system PoE Admin Mode Enable Po Bienes re 3 4 Temperature Threshold D I Degrees C PoE Temperature gO f 25 F Power Budget 150 WW Power Current Allocation Port PoE Mode Schedule Priority Used mA D co Serge gees PDO Alive Check el of of eee ein fewore of Total Loosen the BNC male connector gently Pull out the coaxial cable gently SC 2VIRGS 750 Coaxial Cable PoE PT Camera LRP 101CE LRP 422CST Figure 2 4 How to pull out the coaxial cable from LRP Managed Switch Never pull out the coaxial cable without disabling Long Reach Power over Ethernet function for the port from WebuUI Directly pulling out the coaxial cable could damage the Long Reach Ethernet coaxial extender and the BNC female connector of the LRP Managed Switch 42 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 1 The package contains eight warning stickers which should be stuck on the coaxial cable connector before using PLANET LRP Managed Switch and LRP extender If connected with non PLANET LRP series extender equipment it might cause damage to the equipment 2 After the LRP PoE port is enabled the pin center of the coaxial cable has electricity Do not touch the pin cente
176. etries Priority Modify Figure 4 9 15 Login Authentication List Page Screenshot Description Display the current IP address Display the current port Display the current key Display the current timeout Display the current retry times Display the current priority Edit Click to edit login authentication list parameter Click Delete to delete login authentication list entry 243 A PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 9 4 AAA Authentication authorization and accounting AAA provides a framework for configuring access control on the LRP Managed Switch The three security functions can be summarized as follows e Authentication Identifies users that request access to the network e Authorization Determines if users can access specific services e Accounting Provides reports auditing and billing for services that users have accessed on the network The AAA functions require the use of configured RADIUS or TACACS servers in the network The security servers can be defined as sequential groups that are then applied as a method for controlling user access to specified services For example when the switch attempts to authenticate a user a request is sent to the first server in the defined group if there is no response the second server will be tried and so on If at any point a pass or fail is returned the process stops The LRP Managed Switch supports the following AAA f
177. etwork traffic so only members of the VLAN receive traffic from the same VLAN members The screen in Figure 4 5 20 appears and Table 4 5 2 describes the port configuration of the LRP Managed Switches VLAN Overview SS SS mm SS SS SSS ST em mm SS SSS mm ee Se mm E d i p I i I ew l l I l l 8 E i 1 I l 3 Io l l l i i PC i PC 2 PC 3 E PC 4 PC 5 PC 6 Untagged Untagged Tagged Untagged Untagged Tagged l P d i i VLAN 2 i VLAN 3 i i J bE wm pn pm mm em wm mm SS em mm es mm mm em ms e es em em ms e em mm mm me wm wm wm wm zm mm mm zm wm pm pm pm pm wm E ms mm pm mm mm mn em mm es Figure 4 5 20 Two Separate VLAN Diagrams T o m VLAN Group 1 Table 4 5 2 VLAN and Port Configuration The scenario described as follows 146 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST a Untagged packet entering VLAN 2 1 While PC 1 transmits an untagged packet enters Port 1 the LRP Managed Switch will tag it with a VLAN Tag 2 PC 2 and PC 3 will receive the packet through Port 2 and Port 3 2 PC 4 PC 5 and PC 6 receive no packet 3 While the packet leaves Port 2 it will be stripped away its tag becoming an untagged packet 4 While the packet leaves Port 3 it will be kept as a tagged packet with VLAN Tag 2 D Tagged packet entering VLAN 2 1 While PC 3 transmits a tagged packet with VLAN Tag 2 entering Port 3 PC 1
178. evices on the network to make packet forwarding decisions e Untagged Ports with untagging enabled will strip the 802 1Q tag from all packets that flow into those ports If the packet doesn t have an 802 1Q VLAN tag the port will not alter the packet Thus all packets received by and forwarded by an untagging port will have no 802 1Q VLAN information Remember that the PVID is only used internally within the Switch Untagging is used to send packets from an 802 1Q compliant network device to a non compliant network device Frame Income Income Frame is tagged Income Frame is untagged Frame Leave Leave port is tagged Frame remains tagged Tag is inserted Leave port is untagged Frame remain untagged Table 4 5 1 Ingress Egress Port with VLAN VID Tag Untag Table M IEEE 802 1Q Tunneling Q in Q IEEE 802 1Q Tunneling QinQ is designed for service providers carrying traffic for multiple customers across their networks QinQ tunneling is used to maintain customer specific VLAN and Layer 2 protocol configurations even when different customers use the same internal VLAN IDs This is accomplished by inserting Service Provider VLAN SPVLAN tags into the customer s frames when they enter the service provider s network and then stripping the tags when the frames leave the network 129 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST A service provider s customers may have specific requirements fo
179. f LNK ACT LED is off it indicates that the port is linkdown 2 7 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST Mi 1000BASE SX LX SFP Interfaces GE3 to GE4 Function Lights To indicate the link through that port is successfully established LNK ACT Green Blinking To indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port Lights To indicate that the port is operating at 1000Mbps 1000 Orange Lights If LNK ACT LED lights up it indicates that the port is operating at 100Mbps Off If LNK ACT LED is off it indicates that the port is link down 2 1 4 Switch Upper Panel The Upper Panel of the LRP Managed Switch comes with a DC inlet power socket and one terminal block connector with 6 contacts 1 Insert positive negative DC power wires into contacts 1 and 2 for DC Power 1 or 5 and 6 for DC Power 2 O0O000 0 o0O0000 OO000 EE DC Fauli DCZ m eA m 000000 O00000 OO0000 oO00000 O0O0000 2 Tighten the wire clamp screws for preventing the wires from loosening 1 2 3 4 5 6 V1 V1 V2 V2 Power 1 Power 2 28 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST NN Positive Pin Negative Pin LRP 422CST Pin 1 5 Pin 2 6 1 The wire gauge for the terminal block should be in the range of 12 24 AWG 2 When performing any of the procedures like inserting the wires or tightening the wire clamp screws make sure t
180. fic will be dropped The range for the PVID is 1 4094 e Accepted Type Determines whether the port accepts all frames or only tagged frames This parameter affects VLAN ingress processing If the port only accepts tagged frames untagged frames received on the port are discarded Options All E Tag Only WR Untag Only By default the field is set to All e Ingress Filtering e f ingress filtering is enabled checkbox is checked frames classified to a VLAN that the port is not a member of get discarded e f ingress filtering is disabled frames classified to a VLAN that the port is nota member of are accepted and forwarded to the switch engine However the port will never transmit frames classified to VLANs that it is not a member of e Uplink Enable disable uplink function in trunk port 131 PLANET Networking A Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST e TPID Configure the type TPID of the protocol of switch trunk port Buttons Appl HE Click to apply changes Port VLAN Status TPID Oxo 100 Oxe 100 Uxe 100 Disable Disable Disable Disable 0x8 100 Disable 0x8100 Disable 0x8100 Disable 0x8100 Disable 0x8100 LAG Disable 0x8100 LAG Disable Dep Di ES Z Di EH EH LAGT Las LAG Lan Figure 4 5 6 Edit Interface Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Interface VLA
181. figuration facility By supporting the standard Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP the switch can be managed via any standard management software For text based management the switch can be accessed via Telnet and the console port Moreover the LRP 422CST offers secure remote management by supporting SSH SSL and SNMP v3 connections which encrypt the packet content at each session 15 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST LRP 422CST fee EE ieee 2 Computer SNMPv3s SSH Flexibility and Long distance Extension Solution The LRP 422CST provides two Gigabit TP interfaces supporting 10 100 1000BASE T RJ45 copper to be connected with surveillance network devices such as NVR Video Streaming Server or NAS to facilitate surveillance management Or through another two dual speed fiber SFP slots it can connect with the 100OBASE FX 1000BASE SX LX SFP Small Form factor Pluggable fiber transceiver to uplink to backbone switch and monitoring center in long distance The distance can be extended from 550 meters to 2 kilometers multi mode fiber and up to 10 20 30 40 50 70 120 kilometers single mode fiber or WDM fiber The LRP 422CST is well suited for applications within the enterprise data centers and distributions Intelligent SFP Diagnosis Mechanism The LRP 422CST also supports SFP DDM Digital Diagnostic Monitor function that can easily monitor real time parameters of the SFP for ne
182. figuration screens in Figure 4 2 8 amp Figure 4 2 9 appear System Time System Time Setting P Disable Enable Year 2000 e Month Jan xv D i Doum Minutes O Y Seconds 0 e Mone Disable Day Sun week Month Jan Hours O Y Minutes Day o Y Week 1 Month Jan Hours 0 e Minutes Year 2000 Month Jan Date 1 Hours 0 Minute Y Year 2000 e Month Jon ev Datei Hours 0 Minutes Y Figure 4 2 8 SNTP Setup Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields 63 PLANET Networking amp Communication Object e Enable SNTP e Manual Time e Time Zone e Daylight Saving Time e Daylight Saving Time Offset e Recurring From e Recurring To e Non recurring From e Non recurring To User s Manual of LRP 422CST Description Enabled Enable SNTP mode operation When enabling SNTP mode operation the agent forwards and transfers SNTP messages between the clients and the server when they are not on the same subnet domain Disabled Disable SNTP mode operation To set time manually Year Select the starting Year Month Select the starting month Day Select the starting day Hours Select the starting hour Minutes Select the starting minute Seconds Select the starting seconds Allows to select the time zone according to the current location of switch This is used to set the clock forward or backward according to the configurations set below fo
183. formed Fragments The total number of frames received that were less than 64 octets in length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and had either an FCS or alignment error Jabbers The total number of frames received that were longer than 1518 octets excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and had either an FCS or alignment error Collisions The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment Pkts64Octets The total number of frames including bad packets received and transmitted that were 64 octets in length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets Pkts64to172Octets The total number of frames including bad packets received and transmitted where the number of octets fall within the specified range excluding framing bits but including FCS octets Pkts158to255Octets The total number of frames including bad packets received and transmitted where the number of octets fall within the specified range excluding framing bits but including FCS octets 345 PLANET Networking amp Communication e Sample Interval e Sample Type e Rising Threshold e Falling Threshold e Rising Event e Falling Event e Owner Buttons Appl HEH Click to apply changes User s Manual of LRP 422CST E Pkts256to511Octets The total number of frames including bad packets received and transmitted where the number of octets fall within the specified range excluding fram
184. g and adapters Due to the learning function of the Ethernet switching the source address and corresponding port number of each incoming and outgoing packet is stored in a routing table This information is subsequently used to filter packets whose destination address is on the same segment as the source address This confines network traffic to its respective domain and reduces the overall load on the network The Switch performs Store and forward therefore no error packets occur More reliably it reduces the re transmission rate No packet loss will occur 364 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 5 5 Auto Negotiation The STP ports on the Switch have a built in Auto negotiation This technology automatically sets the best possible bandwidth when a connection is established with another network device usually at Power On or Reset This is done by detecting the modes and speeds when both devices are connected Both 1OBASE T and 100BASE TX devices can connect with the port in either half or full duplex mode If attached device is 100BASE TX port will set to 10Mbps with auto negotiation 10 20Mbps 10BASE T full duplex 100Mbps without auto negotiation 100Mbps 100Mbps with auto negotiation 100 200Mbps 100BASE TX full duplex 365 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 6 TROUBLESHOOTING This chapter contains information to help you so
185. g topics are provided to back up upgrade save and restore the configuration This section has the following items WW Factory Default You can reset the configuration of the switch on this page Mi Reboot Switch You can restart the switch on this page After restart the switch will boot normally Mi Backup Manager You can back up the switch configuration Mi Upgrade Manager You can upgrade the switch configuration HM Dual Image Select active or backup image on this page 4 16 1 Factory Default You can reset the configuration of the switch on this page Only the IP configuration is retained The new configuration is available immediately which means that no restart is necessary The Factory Default screen in Figure 4 16 1 appears and click to reset the configuration to Factory Defaults Factory Default Restore Figure 4 16 1 Factory Default Page Screenshot After the Factory button is pressed and rebooted the system will load the default IP settings as follows Default IP address 192 168 0 100 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 192 168 0 254 The other setting value is back to disable or none To reset the LRP Managed Switch to the factory default setting you can also press the hardware reset ES button on the front panel for about 10 seconds After the device is rebooted you can login the Alien management Web interface within the same subnet of 192 168 0 xx 359 PLANET Networking amp Com
186. gged Untagged Forbidden Excluded Tagged Untagged cee esos OFohaien Exeusee O Toned Ounames sp Hybrid O Forbidden Excluded O Tagged Untagged ooo ooo ep Hyera O Forbidden C Excluded O Tagged Untagged o ooo Ooo fem hyre O Forbidden Excluded Tagged O Untagge 1 TI VLAN ID 2 Port 1 amp 2 Untagged Port 3 amp 7 Tagged Port 4 6 Excluded 150 PLANET User s Manual of LRP 422CST Port to VLAN Settings vanne m Hybrid Forbidden Excluded O Tagged Untagged Hybrid O Forbidden O Excluded Tagged Untagged Tee Hyro Forbidden O Excluded Tagged _O Untagged Jo ep Hyera L Forbidden Excluded O Tagged O Untagged I o o Joem Hybrid O Forbidden O Excluded Tagged GC Untagged fo VLAN ID 3 Port 4 amp 5 Untagged Port 6 amp 7 Tagged Port 1 3 Excluded v Port to VLAN Settings RER GEI Hybrid Forbidden Excluded O Tagged O Untagged GE2 Hybrid Forbidden Excluded Tagged O Untagged GE3 Hybrid O Forbidden Excluded Tagged O Untagged GES Hybrid O Forbidden O Excluded O Tagged Untagged Hybrid Forbidden Excluded Tagged O Untagged GE4 Hybrid Forbidden Excluded Tagged Untagged GE Hybrid O Forbidden O Excluded Tagged O Untagged Sr aes 151 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 6 Spanning Tree Protocol 4 6 1 Theory The Spanning Tree Pr
187. gnment policies Specifically the option works by setting two sub options WR Circuit ID option 1 E Remote ID option 2 The Circuit ID sub option is supposed to include information specific to which circuit the request came in on The Remote ID sub option was designed to carry information relating to the remote host end of the circuit The definition of Circuit ID in the switch is 4 bytes in length and the format is van d module_id port_no The parameter of vlan_id is the first two bytes represent the VLAN ID The parameter of module_id is the third byte for the module ID in standalone switch it always equal 0 in switch it means switch ID The parameter of port_no is the fourth byte and it means the port number After enabling DHCP snooping the switch will monitor all the DHCP messages and implement software transmission The DHCP Rate Limit Setting and Config screens in Figure 4 9 46 amp Figure 4 9 47 appear DHCP Option s2 Global Setting Option82 Global Setting Remote ID Default User Detine Apply Figure 4 9 46 Option 82 Global Setting Page Screenshot 268 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST The page includes the following fields Object Description e State Set the option 2 remote ID option content of option 82 added by DHCP request packets E Default means the default VLAN MAC format E User Define means the remote id content of option 82 specified by us
188. gure 4 8 5 Queue Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Information Name Display the current queue method information e Information Value Display the current queue value information 4 8 2 4 CoS Mapping The CoS to Queue and Queue to CoS Mapping screens in Figure 4 8 6 amp Figure 4 8 7 appear CoS to Queue Mapping Apply Figure 4 8 6 CoS to Queue and Queue to CoS Mapping Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Queue Select Queue value from this drop down list e Class of Service Select CoS value from this drop down list Buttons Apply Click to apply changes 210 PLANET e Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST CoS Mapping Map ping to u ay Fal ee 8 j Ma PE in g to Queue CoS C p Ce 7 B CR E Figure 4 8 7 CoS Mapping Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e CoS Display the current CoS value e Mapping to Queue Display the current mapping to queue e Queue Display the current queue value e Mapping to CoS Display the current mapping to CoS 211 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 8 2 5 DSCP Mapping The DSCP to Queue and Queue to DSCP Mapping screens in Figure 4 8 8 amp Figure 4 8 9 appear DSCP to Queue Mapping Select DSCP Figure 4 8 8 DSCP to Queue and Queue to DSCP
189. he IP device to the switch the IP phone should configure the voice VLAN ID correctly It should be configured through its own GUI Note 222 PLANET Networking amp Communication 4 8 5 2 Properties User s Manual of LRP 422CST The Voice VLAN feature enables voice traffic to forward on the Voice VLAN and then the switch can be classified and scheduled to network traffic It is recommended that there are two VLANs on a port one for voice one for data Before connecting the IP device to the switch the IP phone should configure the voice VLAN ID correctly It should be configured through its own GUI This page provides to select the ingress bandwidth preamble The Ingress Bandwidth Control Setting Status screens in Figure 4 8 22 amp Figure 4 8 23 appear Properties Properties Voice VLAN State Enable Disable Voice VLAN ID T Enable Remark CosS 802 1p Tp Remark Enable Disable Aging Time 30 65536 min 1440 Apply The page includes the following fields Object e Voice VLAN State e Voice VLAN ID e Remark CoS 802 1p e 1p Remark e Aging Time 30 65536 min Figure 4 8 22 Properties Page Screenshot Description Indicates the Voice VLAN mode operation We must disable MSTP feature before we enable Voice VLAN It can avoid the conflict of ingress filter Possible modes are WW Enabled Enable Voice VLAN mode operation ES Disabled Disable Voice VLAN mode operation Indicates the
190. he SFP Module Status screens in Figure 4 3 20 amp Figure 4 3 21 appear Fiber Module Status Port Selected Port EIS Figure 4 3 20 Port Selected Page Screenshot with Sample Switch 108 PLANET Gier User s Manual of LRP 422CST The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select port number from this drop down list Ss GES Fiber Port Status a Connect Tok Fi Singe Mode 8 TX E Wave Length EL Vendor PN J130131 1312312 e Vendor EN VS 3AI1 21331 2313 Temperal ure 7 64 718 C a 33 ECH TA rea power K rm Figure 4 3 21 Fiber Port Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e OE Present Display the current SFP OE present e LOS Display the current SFP LOS 109 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 3 11 2 SFP Module Detail Status The SFP Module Detail Status screen in Figure 4 3 22 appears SFP Module Detail Status Status Table Figure 4 3 22 SFP Module Detail Status Page Screenshot with Sample Switch The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row e Temperature Display the current SFP temperature e Voltage Display the current SFP voltage e Current Display the current SFP current e Output Power Display the current SFP output power e Input Power Display the current SFP
191. he location packets were transmitted or overloaded Displays if the network policies packets were transmitted or overloaded Displays if the extended power via MDI packets were transmitted or overloaded Displays if the 802 3 TLVs were transmitted or overloaded If the LLDP MED extended power via MDI packets were sent or if they were overloaded Displays if the mandatory group of TLVs was transmitted or overloaded Displays if the 802 1 TLVs were transmitted or overloaded 332 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 12 9 LLDP Statistics Use the LLDP Device Statistics screen to general statistics for LLDP capable devices attached to the switch and for LLDP protocol messages transmitted or received on all local interfaces The LLDP Global and Port Statistics screens in Figure 4 12 17 amp Figure 4 12 18 appear LLDP Statistics LLDP Global Statistics Clear Refresh Insertions D Deletions DE Sen E age ous p Figure 4 12 17 LLDP Global Statistics Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Insertions Shows the number of new entries added since switch reboot e Deletions Shows the number of new entries deleted since switch reboot e Drops Shows the number of LLDP frames dropped due to that the entry table was full e Age Outs Shows the number of entries deleted due to Time To Live expiring Buttons Clear Click to clear the statistics Ref
192. he page includes the following fields hort ta at US erify OUT EI v B indin d E ntr C urre nt B H nding E ntry epa rm mn rea beach beten E rea beach beten E ree each beten E m beach beten EK ee osef beten E ees beach beten E e each beten E Figure 4 9 62 IP Source Guard Port Setting Page Screenshot Object Port Status Verify Source Max Binding Entry Current Binding Entry Description The switch port number of the logical port Display the current status Display the current verify source Display the current max binding entry Display the current binding entry 281 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 9 9 2 Binding Table The IP Source Guard Static Binding Entry and Table Status screens in Figure 4 9 63 amp Figure 4 9 64 appear IP Source Guard Binding Table eae eet source Guard Static Binding Entry VLAN ID MAC Address IP Address 7 a a Add Figure 4 9 63 IP Source Guard Static Binding Entry Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select port from this drop down list e VLAN ID Indicates the ID of this particular VLAN e MAC Address Sourcing MAC address is allowed e IP Address Sourcing IP address is allowed Buttons Add Click to add authentication list IP Source Guard Binding Table Status Figure 4 9 64 IP Source Guard Binding Table Status Page Screenshot The page includes the followi
193. he power is OFF to prevent from getting an electric shock 2 1 5 Wiring the Fault Alarm Contact The fault alarm contacts are in the middle 3 amp 4 of the terminal block connector as the picture shows below Inserting the wires the Industrial Managed Switch will detect the fault status of the power failure or port link failure available for managed model The following illustration shows an application example for wiring the fault alarm contacts Insert the wires into the fault alarm contacts 1 The wire gauge for the terminal block should be in the range of 12 24 AWG 2 When performing any of the procedures like inserting the wires or tightening the wire clamp screws make sure the power is OFF to prevent from getting an electric shock 29 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 2 2 Installing the LRP Managed Switch This section describes how to install your LRP Managed Switch and make connections to the LRPI Managed Switch Please read the following topics and perform the procedures in the order being presented To install your LRP Managed Switch on a desktop or shelf simply complete the following steps In this paragraph we will describe how to install the LRP Managed Switch and the installation points attended to it 2 2 1 Installation Steps Unpack the LRP Managed Switch Check if the DIN Rail is screwed on the LRP Managed Switch or not If the DIN Rail is not screwe
194. here are three ACE frame types Ethernet Type ARP and IPv4 and two ACE actions permit and deny The ACE also contains many detailed different parameter options that are available for individual application The ACL page contains links to the following main topics E MAC based ACL Configure MAC based ACL setting S MAC based ACE Add Edit Delete the MAC based ACE Access Control Entry setting E IPv4 based ACL Configure IPv4 based ACL setting a IPv4 based ACE Add Edit Delete the IPv4 based ACE Access Control Entry setting E IPv6 based ACL Configure Pv6 based ACL setting a IPv6 based ACE Add Edit Delete the IPv6 based ACE Access Control Entry setting E ACL Binding Configure the ACL parameters ACE of each switch port 4 10 1 MAC based ACL This page shows the ACL status by different ACL users Each row describes the ACE that is defined It is a conflict if a specific ACE is not applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations MAC based ACL screens in Figure 4 10 1 amp Figure 4 10 2 appear MAC Based ACL MAC Based ACL Add Figure 4 10 1 MAC based ACL Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e ACL Name Create a name from MAC based ACL list 293 PLANET E Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST ACL Table Figure 4 10 2 ACL Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Dele
195. his entry should belong to The string must contain an even number between 10 and 64 hexadecimal digits but all zeros and all F s are not allowed Buttons Appl HE Click to apply changes Engine ID Status Information Name Information Value Use Default Enabled Engine ID UO a82ZOS 00005041122 Figure 4 2 36 SNMPv3 Engine ID Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e User Default Display the current status e Engine ID Display the current engine ID 4 2 7 10 SNMP Remote Engine ID Configure SNMPv3 remote Engine ID on this page The SNMPv3 Remote Engine ID Setting screens in Figure 4 2 37 amp Figure 4 2 38 appear Remote EnginelD Setting IP Address Engine ID EES T ro as kel a Fb a fb a Remote 35 Add Figure 4 2 37 SNMPv3 Remote Engine ID Setting Page Screenshot 86 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST The page includes the following fields Object Description e Remote IP Address Indicates the SNMP remote engine ID address It allows a valid IP address in dotted decimal notation x y z w e Engine ID An octet string identifying the engine ID that this entry should belong to Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Remote Engine ID Status Remote IP Address Remote Engine ID Figure 4 2 38 SNMPv3 Remote Engine ID Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Desc
196. iate ACLs The ACL Policy screens in Figure 4 10 13 amp Figure 4 10 14 appear ACL Binding Binding Port ACL Select MAC Hased ACL ei Select Ports IPv4i Based ACL V IPvi Based ACL Apply Figure 4 10 13 ACL Binding Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Binding Port Select port from this drop down list e ACL Select Select ACL list from this drop down list Buttons Apply Click to apply changes 309 PLANET E User s Manual of LRP 422CST ACL Binding Table Figure 4 10 14 ACL Binding Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e MAC ACL Display the current MAC ACL e IPv4 ACL Display the current IPv4 ACL e IPv6 ACL Display the current IPv6 ACL e Modify Click Edit to edit ACL binding table parameter Click CRETETED A delete ACL binding entry 310 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 11 MAC Address Table Switching of frames is based upon the DMAC address contained in the frame The LRP Managed Switch builds up a table that maps MAC addresses to switch ports for knowing which ports the frames should go to based upon the DMAC address in the frame This table contains both static and dynamic entries The static entries are configured by the network administrator if the administrator wants to do a fixed mapping between the DMAC a
197. icer The default value is unlimited Buttons Apply Click to apply changes 217 eae User s Manual of LRP 422CST ARP Rate Limit Config Figure 4 9 60 ARP Rate Limit Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Rate Limit pps Display the current rate limit 278 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 9 9 IP Source Guard IP Source Guard is a secure feature used to restrict IP traffic on DHCP snooping untrusted ports by filtering traffic based on the DHCP Snooping Table or manually configured IP Source Bindings It helps prevent IP spoofing attacks when a host tries to spoof and use the IP address of another host After receiving a packet the port looks up the key attributes including IP address MAC address and VLAN tag of the packet in the binding entries of the IP source guard If there is a matching entry the port will forward the packet Otherwise the port will abandon the packet IP source guard filters packets based on the following types of binding entries E IP port binding entry E MAC port binding entry E IP MAC port binding entry IP Source Guard Overview DHCP Snooping Enable IP Source Guard Enable DHCP Trusted Port DHCP Snooping Binding Table Invader Port MAN ID_IP Address _ MAC Address l l 192 168 0 1 A 10 1 192 168 0 2 C 279 PLANET
198. ices The displayed table contains a row for each port on which an LLDP neighbor is detected The LLDP Remote Device screen in Figure 4 12 9 appears LLDP Remote Device LLDP Remote Device Detail Delete Refresh Set Local Port Chassis 10 Subtype Chassis D Port 1D Subtype Figure 4 12 9 LLDP Remote Device Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Local Port Display the current local port e Chassis ID Subtype Display the current chassis ID subtype e Chassis ID The Chassis ID is the identification of the neighbor s LLDP frames e Port ID Subtype Display the current port ID subtype e Port ID The Remote Port ID is the identification of the neighbor port e System Name System Name is the name advertised by the neighbor unit e Time to Live Display the current time to live Buttons Delete Click to delete LLDP remote device entry Refresh l l Click to refresh LLDP remote device 324 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 12 6 MED Network Policy Network Policy Discovery enables the efficient discovery and diagnosis of mismatch issues with the VLAN configuration along with the associated Layer 2 and Layer 3 attributes which apply for a set of specific protocol applications on that port Improper network policy configurations are a very significant issue in VoIP environments that frequently result in voice quality degradation or loss of service
199. ict if a specific ACE is not applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations Pv6 based ACL screens in Figure 4 10 9 amp Figure 4 10 10 appear IPv6 Based ACL IPv6 Based ACL Add Figure 4 10 9 Pv6 based ACL Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e ACL Name Create a name from IPv6 based ACL list Buttons Add l Click to add ACL name list ACL Table Figure 4 10 10 ACL Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Delete Click Delete to delete ACL name entry 303 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 10 6 IPv6 based ACE An ACE consists of several parameters Different parameter options are displayed depending on the frame type that you select The IPv6 based ACE screens in Figure 4 10 11 amp Figure 4 10 12 appear IPv6 Based ACE sd Range 1 2147483647 1 is first processed Permit Deny Shutdown Any IP Select from list be ze GI Any OUser Defined Range 0 128 Any OUser Defined os Qs for matching 1s for no matching ANY Single o Range 0 65535 Range ess Range 0 65535 Any Single Range 0 65535 bo Range 0 65535 Range Range 0 66536 Range 0 65535 Don t Care ACK Set Unset Don t Care Fsh Set Unset Don t Care i Don t care Don t Care
200. iew entry The following target types are supported Buffered Target the buffered of the log view E File Target the file of the log view e Severity The severity of the log view entry The following severity types are supported E emerg Emergency level of the system unstable for log view alert Alert level of the immediate action needed for log view crit Critical level of the critical conditions for log view error Error level of the error conditions for log view warning Warning level of the warning conditions for log view notice Notice level of the normal but significant conditions for log view info Informational level of the informational messages for log view debug Debug level of the debugging messages for log view e Category The category of the log view includes AAA ACL CABLE_DIAG DAI DHCP_SNOOPING Dot1X GVRP IGMP_SNOOPING IPSG L2 LLDP Mirror MLD_ SNOOPING Platform PM Port PORT_SECURITY QoS Rate SNMP and STP Buttons View Click to view log Logging Information Information Name Information Value Target Buffered Severity Emerg Alert Crit Error Warning Notice AAA ACL CABLE DIAG DA DHCP SNOOPINGS Dotis Eire en Sila Sie esi ee LEIS litte MCCS Er Teepe ital elit claret EE EE Eer Rate SNMP STP Security suite system Trunk VLAN Category Total Entries Figure 4 2 19 Logging Information Page Screenshot 72 PLANET C Networking amp Communication User
201. ific source port range filter with this ACE you can enter a specific source port range value A field for entering a source port value appears The allowed range is 0 to 65535 Aframe that hits this ACE matches this source port value Specify the destination port for this ACE E Any No specific destination port is specified destination port status is don t care Single If you want to filter a specific destination port with this ACE you can enter a specific destination port value A field for entering a destination port value appears The allowed range is 0 to 65535 Aframe that hits this ACE matches this destination port value Range If you want to filter a specific destination port range filter with this ACE you can enter a specific destination port range value A field for entering a destination port value appears UGR Specify the TCP Urgent Pointer field significant URG value for this ACE E Set TCP frames where the URG field is set must be able to match this entry E Unset TCP frames where the URG field is set must not be able to match this entry WR Don t Care Any value is allowed don t care ACK Specify the TCP Acknowledgment field significant ACK value for this ACE mM Set TCP frames where the ACK field is set must be able to match this entry E Unset TCP frames where the ACK field is set must not be able to match this entry WR Don t Care Any value is allowed don t care PSH Sp
202. ilure frame when the port link comes up and any client on the port will be disallowed network access e Reauthentication If checked successfully authenticated supplicants clients are reauthenticated Enable after the interval specified by the Reauthentication Period Reauthentication for 802 1X enabled ports can be used to detect if a new device is plugged into a 233 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST switch port or if a supplicant is no longer attached e Reauthentication Determines the period in seconds after which a connected client must be Period reauthenticated This is only active if the Reauthentication Enabled checkbox is checked Valid values are in the range 30 to 65535 seconds e Quiet Period Sets time to keep silent on supplicant authentication failure e Supplicant Period Sets the interval for the supplicant to re transmit EAP request identify frame e Maximum Request The number of times that the switch transmits an EAPOL Request Identity frame Retries without response before considering entering the Guest VLAN is adjusted with this setting The value can only be changed if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled Buttons Appl PPY Click to apply changes 802 1X Port Status Po tatus Periodic Reauthentication Quiet pps pp Reauthentication Period Period Timeout Dis abled 802 1 SE 2 J H 2 J 4 E E
203. ined by a unique name Users must be configured with a specific security level and assigned to a group The SNMPv3 group restricts users to a specific read write and notify view The entry index key is User Name The SNMPv3 User Setting screens in Figure 4 2 29 amp Figure 4 2 30 appear SNMP User Table User Setting Privilege Authentic ation Authentication Encryption noauth T Mone T Mone T 0 16 chars fa 16 chars Figure 4 2 29 SNMPv3 Users Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e User Name A string identifying the user name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 16 e Group The SNMP Access Group A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to e Privilege Mode Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are S NoAuth None authentication and none privacy i Auth Authentication and none privacy S Priv Authentication and privacy The value of security level cannot be modified if entry already exists That means you must first ensure that the value is set correctly e Authentication Indicates the authentication protocol that this entry should belong to Possible Protocol authentication protocols are a None None authentication protocol Si MD5 An optional flag to indicate that this user using MD5 authentication protocol a SHA An optional flag to indicate that this user usi
204. information transmitted Buttons Appl HEH Click to apply changes LLDP Port Status State Selected Optional TLVs mel PEZ PES FE GE Ei GEZ GEA Figure 4 12 4 LLDP Port Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e State Display the current LLDP status e Selected Optional Display the current selected optional TLVs TLVs 320 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST The VLAN Name TLV VLAN Selection and LLDP Port VLAN TLV Status screens in Figure 4 12 5 amp Figure 4 12 6 appear VLAN Name TLV VLAN Selection Port Select VLAN Select Apply Figure 4 12 5 VLAN Name TLV Selection Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select Select port from this drop down list e VLAN Select Select VLAN from this drop down list Buttons Apply Click to apply changes LLDP Port VLAN TLV Status pon Selected VLAN re ra ra ey sn Jooo Ce se ooo C E Figure 4 12 6 LLDP Port VLAN TLV Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Selected VLAN Display the current selected VLAN 321 PLANET Networking amp Communication 4 12 4 LLDP Local Device User s Manual of LRP 422CST Use the LLDP Local Device Information screen
205. ing bits but including FCS octets E Pkts512to1023Octets The total number of frames including bad packets received and transmitted where the number of octets fall within the specified range excluding framing bits but including FCS octets E Pkts1024to1518Octets The total number of frames including bad packets received and transmitted where the number of octets fall within the specified range excluding framing bits but including FCS octets Sample interval 1 2147483647 The method of sampling the selected variable and calculating the value to be compared against the thresholds possible sample types are E Absolute Get the sample directly default W Delta Calculate the difference between samples Rising threshold value 0O 2147483647 Falling threshold value 0O 2147483647 Event to fire when the rising threshold is crossed Event to fire when the falling threshold is crossed Specify an owner for the alarm RMON Alarm VC Sample Sample Sampnle Sample Rising Falling Rising Falling Action Port Variable Interval Type Threshold Threshold Event Event Figure 4 14 6 RMON Alarm Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e Index e Sample Port e Sample Variable Description Indicates the index of Alarm control entry Display the current sample port Display the current sample variable 346 PLANET Networking amp Communication e Sample Interval e Sample
206. ion 4 1 2 1 Saving Configuration In the LRP Managed Switch the running configuration file stores in the RAM In the current version the running configuration sequence of running config can be saved from the RAM to FLASH by Save Configurations to FLASH function so that the running configuration sequence becomes the startup configuration file which is called configuration save To save all applied changes and set the current configuration as a startup configuration The startup configuration file will be loaded automatically across a system reboot 1 Click Save gt Save Configurations to FLASH to login the Configuration Manager page SAVE LOGOUT REBOOT REFRESH Save Configurations ta FLASH Restore ta Detaults 2 Select Source File Running Configuration and Destination File Startup Configuration 55 PLANET KE Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST save Configuration Running configuration Startup configuration Backup configuration Startup configuration Backup configuration Apply 3 Press the Apply button to save running configuration to start up configuration 56 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 2 System Use the System menu items to display and configure basic administrative details of the LRP Managed Switch Under System the following topics are provided to configu
207. ion e Group ID Display the current group ID e Frame Type Display the current frame type e Protocol Value Display the current protocol value ee Delete Click to delete the group ID entry 4 5 9 Protocol VLAN Port Setting This page allows you to map an already configured Group Name to a VLAN port for the switch The Protocol VLAN Port Setting State screens in Figure 4 5 11 amp Figure 4 5 12 appear Protocol VLAN Port Setting af OU M ah DN i be AA Eeri WM KA 4 LPM Select Ports croupiof Ovan ipg Add Figure 4 5 11 Protocol VLAN Port Setting Page Screenshot 137 PLANET C Networking amp Communication The page includes the following fields Object e Port e Group e VLAN Buttons Add User s Manual of LRP 422CST Description Select port from this drop down list to assign protocol VLAN port Select group ID from this drop down list to protocol VLAN group VLAN ID assigned to the Special Protocol VLAN Group Click to add protocol VLAN port entry Protocol VLAN Port State Figure 4 5 12 Protocol VLAN Port State Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e Port e Group ID e VLAN ID e Delete Description Display the current port Display the current group ID Display the current VLAN ID Click Delete to delete the group ID entry 138 PLANET User s Manual of LRP 422CST Networking amp Communication 4 5 10 GVRP Setting GARP VLAN Regist
208. ion List Default Password Retry Count Current SSH Sessions Count Figure 4 9 26 SSH Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e SSH Service Display the current SSH service e Login Authentication List Display the current login authentication list e Enable Authentication List Display the current enable authentication list e Session Timeout Display the current session timeout e Password Retry Count Display the current password retry count e Silent Time Display the current silent time e Current SSH Session Count Display the current SSH session count 252 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 9 5 4 HTTP The HTTP Settings and Information screens in Figure 4 9 27 amp Figure 4 9 28 appear HTTP Settings HTTP Settings Enable Disable jin Authentication List Default V ssion Timeout 10 0 86400 minutes Apply Figure 4 9 25 HTTP Settings Page Screenshot 7 The page includes the following fields Object Description e HTTP Service Disable or enable HTTP service e Login Authentication List Select login authentication list from this drop down list e Session Timeout Set the session timeout value Buttons Apply Click to apply changes HTTP Information Information Name Information Value Login Authentication List Figure 4 9 26 HTTP Information Page Screenshot8 The page includes the following fiel
209. irmware Version Firmware Date System Object ID System Up Time PCN HW Version Click to edit parameter User s Manual of LRP 422CST Description Display the current system name Display the current system location Display the current system contact The MAC address of this LRP Managed Switch The IP address of this LRP Managed Switch The subnet mask of this LRP Managed Switch The gateway of this LRP Managed Switch The loader version of this LRP Managed Switch The loader date of this LRP Managed Switch The firmware version of this LRP Managed Switch The firmware date of this LRP Managed Switch The system object ID of the LRP Managed Switch The period of time the device has been operational The hardware version of this LRP Managed Switch The IP Configuration includes the IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway The configured column is used to view or change the IP configuration Fill out the IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway for the device The screens in Figure 4 2 2 amp Figure 4 2 3 appear IP Address IP Address Setting Static DHCP IP Address Subnet Mask DNS Server 1 DNS Server 2 192 160 0100 255 255 255 0 165 95 1 1 165 95 192 1 Figure 4 2 2 IP Address Setting Page Screenshot 58 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST The page includes the following fields Object Description e Mode Indicates the IP address mode operation Possible mo
210. is column allows users to add or delete VLAN s e VLAN Name Prefix Indicates the name of this particular VLAN Buttons Apply Click to apply changes VLAN Table VLANID VLANName VLAN Type Modify oo fpem foen fem Figure 4 5 4 VLAN Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID Display the current VLAN ID entry e VLAN Name Display the current VLAN ID name 128 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST e VLAN Type Display the current VLAN ID type e Modify Edit Click to modify VLAN configuration 4 5 5 Interface Settings This page is used for configuring the LRP Managed Switch port VLAN The VLAN per Port Configuration Page contains fields for managing ports that are part of a VLAN The port default VLAN ID PVID is configured on the VLAN Port Configuration Page All untagged packets arriving to the device are tagged by the ports PVID Understand nomenclature of the Switch E IEEE 802 1Q Tagged and Untagged Every port on an 802 1Q compliant switch can be configured as tagged or untagged e Tagged Ports with tagging enabled will put the VID number priority and other VLAN information into the header of all packets that flow into those ports If a packet has previously been tagged the port will not alter the packet thus keeping the VLAN information intact The VLAN information in the tag can then be used by other 802 1Q compliant d
211. isable QoS mode Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Ps QoS Informations Information Name Information Value Figure 4 8 2 QoS Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e QoS Mode Display the current QoS mode 206 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 8 2 2 QoS Port Settings The QoS Port Settings and Status screens in Figure 4 8 2 amp Figure 4 8 3 appear QoS Port Settings QoS Port Settings Cos Value Remark CoS Cos Remark DSCP DSCP Remark IP Precedence IP Precedence Select Ports Disable Enable Disable Enable Disable Enable Apply Figure 4 8 2 QoS Port Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select Select port number from this drop down list e CoS Value Select CoS value from this drop down list e Remark CoS Disable or enable remark CoS e Remark DSCP Disable or enable remark DSCP e Remark IP Precedence Disable or enable remark IP Precedence Buttons Appl PPY Click to apply changes 207 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST O05 Port Status Port Co falue emar k Cos mar k SCP ar k IP Pre fet lo owe ovate Ome ek Deve Bea Je rea fo Deavie Bea Je ek Deave Bea oome ek Jean Bea osme sek osae Bea ose sek ear Be Jee ee o osae ose osme ek osae osae osme ek osae Be
212. ist List Name Method 1 Method 2 Method 3 Add Figure 4 9 20 Login Authentication List Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e List Name Display the current list name e Method List Display the current method list e Modify Click Edit to edit login authentication list parameter Click Delete to delete login authentication list entry 246 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 9 5 Access This section is to control the access of the LRP Managed Switch including the different access methods Telnet SSH HTTP and HTTPs 4 9 5 1 Console The Console Settings and Information screens in Figure 4 9 21 amp Figure 4 9 22 appear Console Settings Console Settings Login Authentication List Default ae 0 65535 minutes 0 120 0 65535 seconds _ Apply Figure 4 9 21 Console Settings Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description Login Authentication List Select login authentication list from this drop down list Enable Authentication List Select enable authentication list from this drop down list e Session Timeout Set the session timeout value e Password Retry Count Set the password retry count value e Silent Time Set the silent time value Buttons Appl PPY Click to apply changes 247 PLANET
213. ist Indicates the LAG state operation Possible states are Enabled Start up the LAG manually Disabled Shut down the LAG manually Select any available link speed for the given switch port Draw the menu bar to select the mode M Auto Set up Auto negotiation Auto 10M Set up 10M Auto negotiation Auto 100M Set up 100M Auto negotiation Auto 1000M Set up 1000M Auto negotiation Auto 10 100M Set up 10 100M Auto negotiation 10M Set up 10M Force mode 100M Set up 100M Force mode 1000M Set up 1000M Force mode When Auto Speed is selected for a port this section indicates the flow control 115 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST capability that is advertised to the link partner When a fixed speed setting is selected that is what is used The current RX column indicates whether pause frames on the port are obeyed The current TX column indicates whether pause frames on the port are transmitted The RX and TX settings are determined by the result of the last Auto Negotiation Check the configured column to use flow control This setting is related to the setting for Configured Link Speed Buttons Apply Click to apply changes LAG Port Status TEN Port Enable Link Flow Control Flow Control Disie e ferme fano fano forame forare Deme el ferme fane fano forame orane Figure 4 4 7 LAG Port Status Page Screenshot The page include
214. itional considerations when the switch itself is a DHCP client The port s through which the switch submits a client request to the DHCP server must be configured as trusted Note that the switch will not add a dynamic entry for itself to the binding table when it receives an ACK message from a DHCP server Also when the switch sends out DHCP client packets for itself no filtering takes place However when the switch receives any messages from a DHCP server any packets received from untrusted ports are dropped 4 9 7 2 Global Setting DHCP Snooping is used to block intruder on the untrusted ports of switch when it tries to intervene by injecting a bogus DHCP reply packet to a legitimate conversation between the DHCP client and server Configure DHCP Snooping on this page The DHCP Snooping Setting and Information screens in Figure 4 9 35 amp Figure 4 9 36 appear DHCP Snooping Setting DHCP Snooping Setting DHCP Snooping Enable zs Disable Apply Figure 4 9 35 DHCP Snooping Setting Page Screenshot 259 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST The page includes the following fields Object Description e DHCP Snooping Indicates the DHCP snooping mode operation Possible modes are m Enabled Enable DHCP snooping mode operation When DHCP snooping mode operation is enabled the request DHCP messages will be forwarded to trusted ports and only allowed reply packets from trusted ports
215. keep the default factory settings and STP will automatically assign root bridges ports and block loop connections Influencing STP to choose a particular switch as the root bridge using the Priority setting or influencing STP to choose a particular port to block using the Port Priority and Port Cost settings is however relatively straight forward 156 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST A LAN 1 _ gt Port cost 200 000 A Bridge ID 15 Port cost 20 000 Port cost 20 000 Port cost 20 000 Port cost 20 000 B c Bridge ID 30 Bridge ID 20 Port cost 200 000 Port cost 200 000 Port cost 200 000 A LAN 2 gt A LAN3 _ gt Figure 4 6 2 Before Applying the STA Rules In this example only the default STP values are used ges Root Bridge Designated Port Designated Port Root Port Root Port C mer Designated Bridge A LAN2 _ gt ln LAND Figure 4 6 3 After Applying the STA Rules 157 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST The switch with the lowest Bridge ID switch C was elected the root bridge and the ports were selected to give a high port cost between switches B and C The two optional Gigabit ports default port cost 20 000 on switch A are connected to one optional Gigabit port on both switch B and C The redundant link between switch B and C is deli
216. l Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Figure 4 5 16 GVRP Port Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Enable Status Display the current GVRP port state e Registration Mode Display the current registration mode e VLAN Creation Status Display the current VLAN creation status 142 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 5 12 GVRP VLAN The GVRP VLAN Database screen in Figure 4 5 17 appears GVRP VLAN Database GVRP VLAN Database Figure 4 5 17 GVRP VLAN Database Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID Display the current VLAN ID e Member Ports Display the current member ports e Dynamic Ports Display the current dynamic ports e VLAN Type Display the current VLAN type 4 5 13 GVRP Statistics The GVRP Port Statistics and Error Statistics screens in Figure 4 5 18 amp Figure 4 5 19 appear 143 PL Networking A NET GVRP Statistics User s Manual of LRP 422CST GVRP Port Statistics Clear Refresh Jc vin Vi SW ae E ae VP A li A Jo oin HM Figure 4 5 18 GVRP Port Statistics Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Join Empty Rx Tx Display the current join e
217. le State L2 Entry Num Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Figure 4 9 66 Port Security Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Name The switch port number of the logical port e Enable State Display the current per port security status e L2 Entry Num Display the current L2 entry number e Action Display the current action 284 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 9 11 DoS The DoS is short for Denial of Service which is a simple but effective destructive attack on the internet The server under DoS attack will drop normal user data packet due to non stop processing the attacker s data packet leading to the denial of the service and worse can lead to leak of sensitive data of the server Security feature refers to applications such as protocol check which is for protecting the server from attacks such as DoS The protocol check allows the user to drop matched packets based on specified conditions The security features provide several simple and effective protections against Dos attacks while acting no influence on the linear forwarding performance of the switch 4 9 11 1 Global DoS Setting The Global DoS Setting and Information screens in Figure 4 9 67 amp Figure 4 9 68 appear Dos Global Setting Global DoS Setting Enable Disable Enable O Disable
218. lick to clear the RMON statistics 341 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 14 2 RMON Event Configure RMON Event table on this page The RMON Event screens in Figure 4 14 2 amp Figure 4 14 3 appear RMON Event Settings RMON Event Select F VER Create Mew Index 0 1 655325 TyPe Owner 0 31 characters Description U 12 7 characters Apply Figure 4 14 2 RMON Event Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Select Index Select index from this drop down list to create new index or modify index e Index Indicates the index of the entry The range is from 1 to 65535 e Type Indicates the notification of the event the possible types are E none The total number of octets received on the interface including framing characters log The number of uni cast packets delivered to a higher layer protocol SNMP Trap The number of broad cast and multi cast packets delivered to a higher layer protocol E Log and Trap The number of inbound packets that are discarded even the packets are normal e Community Specify the community when trap is sent the string length is from 0 to 127 default is public e Owner Indicates the owner of this event the string length is from 0 to 127 default is a null string e Description Indicates description of this event the string length is from 0 to 127 default is a null string 342 PLAN
219. lor Password Figure 4 1 2 Login screen Default User Name admin Default Password admin After entering the username and password the main screen appears as Figure 4 1 3 Q PLANET Hetworking amp Communication SAVE LOGOUT REBOOT REFRESH LRP 422CST Welcome to PLANET LRP 422CST Industrial 4 Port Coax Long Reach PoE 2 Port 10 100 1000T 2 Port 100 1000X SFP Managed Switch PLANET Technology Corporation 10F No 96 Minquan Rd Xindian Dist New Taipei City 231 Taiwan R O C Tel 886 2 2219 9518 Fax 6886 2 2219 9528 Email support planet com tw Copyright 2015 PLANET Technology Corporation All rights reserved Figure 4 1 3 Default Main Page 51 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST Now you can use the Web management interface to continue the switch management or manage the LRP Managed Switch by Web interface The Switch Menu on the left of the web page lets you access all the commands and statistics the LRP Managed Switch provides It is recommended to use Internet Explore 8 0 or above to access LRP Managed Switch The changed IP address takes effect immediately after clicking on the Save button You need to use the new IP address to access the Web interface For security reason please change and memorize the new password after this first setup Only accept command in lowercase letter under Web interface 4 1 Main Web Page The L
220. lter Seti EE 204 AS OUV OP SOU Ce E 205 4 8 1 Understanding QOS EN 205 aE OS EE 206 4 8 2 1 QOS Properties aannnannnannnannnennnennneirnarnnrrrnrrrrrnnrrrrrnnirsrrrsrirsrirerrrsnrrenren rentre rire nrrene rrr rrn nnr n rnn rer nern enn 206 Toer GO ROC EUN eae a eee eee ee oe eee eres 207 48 23 Queue le GE 209 48 24 COS Mapping E 210 4 8 2 5 DSCP Mapping EE 212 4 9 2 6 Frecedence Mapping EE 214 e Ee e 216 A365 1 GIO Bal SE Un e escsccdcactcnscetseneshoseseebsessenensene cies dcnctcun R E ei onis dn aien niaidne anda bei eiiiai 216 AE ue 217 AoA EC Elo TE 218 4 8 4 1 Ingress Bandwidth Control cccccccecccecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeseaegeeeesaeeeeeseeseesaees 218 4 8 4 2 Egress Bandwidth Control 219 4 8 4 3 Egress Oueue cee 221 7 feo Bo VCE 4 DEE 222 4 5 0 1 Introduction to Voice VLAN E 222 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST MRE REA ei 223 4 8 5 3 Telephony OUI MAC Gettmg renen 225 4 8 5 4 Telephony OUI Port Setting EE 226 AO SOC NY ee 228 A OOR Gene ne eee eee E E eee ee a 228 4 9 1 1 Understanding IEEE 802 1X Port based Authentication ccccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeees 229 TOTZ 3 EE 232 ie ee eo EE Port de EE 233 4 9 1 4 Guest VLAN Setting ccccecccccceeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeessaeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeseaeeessaaeeeeseeeeesaees 235 4 9 1 5 Authenticated
221. lve your issue If the LRP Managed Switch is not functioning properly make sure the LRP Managed Switch is set up according to instructions in this manual WW The Link LED is not lit Solution Check the cable connection and remove duplex mode of the LRP Managed Switch HM Some stations cannot talk to other stations located on the other port Solution Please check the VLAN settings trunk settings or port enabled disabled status WW Performance is bad Solution Check the full duplex status of the LRP Managed Switch If the LRP Managed Switch is set to full duplex and the partner is set to half duplex then the performance will be poor Please also check the in out rate of the port Mi Why the Switch doesn t connect to the network Solution 1 Check the LNK ACT LED on the LRP Managed Switch 2 Try another port on the LRP Managed Switch 3 Make sure the cable is installed properly 4 Make sure the cable is the right type 5 Turn off the power After a while turn on power again WW 100BASE TX port link LED is lit but the traffic is irregular Solution Check that the attached device is not set to full duplex Some devices use a physical or software switch to change duplex modes Auto negotiation may not recognize this type of full duplex setting Mi Switch does not power up Solution 1 AC power cord is not inserted or faulty 2 Check whether the AC power cord is inserted correctly 3 Replace the power cord if the cord is inserte
222. m Disabled Disable DHCP snooping mode operation Buttons Appl HEH Click to apply changes DHCP Snooping Informations DHCP Snooping disabled Figure 4 9 36 DHCP Snooping Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e DHCP Snooping Display the current DHCP snooping status 4 9 7 3 VLAN Setting Command Usage e When DHCP snooping is enabled globally on the switch and enabled on the specified VLAN DHCP packet filtering will be performed on any untrusted ports within the VLAN e When the DHCP snooping is globally disabled DHCP snooping can still be configured for specific VLANs but the changes will not take effect until DHCP snooping is globally re enabled e When DHCP snooping is globally enabled and DHCP snooping is then disabled on a VLAN all dynamic bindings learned for this VLAN are removed from the binding table 260 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST The DHCP Snooping VLAN Setting screens in Figure 4 9 37 amp Figure 4 9 38 appear DHCP Snooping VLAN Setting DHCP Snooping VLAN Setting VLAN LIST Status Apply Figure 4 9 37 DHCP Snooping VLAN Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN List Indicates the ID of this particular VLAN e Status Indicates the DHCP snooping mode operation Possible modes are m Enabled Enable DHCP snooping mode operation When
223. m to the CPU for feature processing The overall purpose of IGMP Snooping is to limit the forwarding of multicast frames to only ports that are a member of the multicast group About the Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP Snooping Computers and network devices that want to receive multicast transmissions need to inform nearby routers that they will become members of a multicast group The Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP is used to communicate this information IGMP is also used to periodically check the multicast group for members that are no longer active In the case where there is more than one multicast router on a sub network one router is elected as the queried This router then keeps track of the membership of the multicast groups that have active members The information received from IGMP is then used to determine if multicast packets should be forwarded to a given sub network or not The router can check using IGMP to see if there is at least one member of a multicast group on a given subnet work If there are no members on a sub network packets will not be forwarded to that sub network Give me multicast A stream Multicast X Receiver Multicast w Switch Transmitter Sa A e ge Se EC IPTV A beem Server Router Switch Receiver A Switch Give me multicast du Stream Multicast i e Receiver D Figure 4 7 3 Multicast Service 174 PLANET
224. mart Discovery Utility For easily listing the LRP Managed Switch in your Ethernet environment the Planet Smart Discovery Utility from user s manual CD ROM is an ideal solution The following installation instructions are to guide you to running the Planet Smart Discovery Utility 1 Deposit the Planet Smart Discovery Utility in administrator PC 2 Run this utility as the following screen appears oy PLANET Smart Discovery Lite File Option Help J Refresh x Exit select Adapter 192 168 0 21 40 61 96 04 18 69 Control Packet Force Broadcast Figure 3 1 6 Planet Smart Discovery Utility Screen 48 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST If there are two LAN cards or above in the same administrator PC choose a different LAN card by using the Select Adapter tool 192 768 0700 255 255 255 0 192 165 0254 LAF 422C5T select Adapter 192 168 0 21 40 61 96 04 18 69 Control Packet Force Broadcast Update Multi Update All E Device WNE T 6033 00 30 4F 4 4 9B F9 Get Device Information done Figure 3 1 7 Planet Smart Discovery Utility Screen 1 This utility shows all necessary information from the devices such as MAC Address Device Name firmware version and Device IP Subnet address It can also assign new password IP subnet address and description to the devices 2 After setup is completed press the Update Device Update Multi or Update All b
225. mation 1 0b150820 bix Flash Partition E Image Mame 1 0b150520 bix 1 0b150820 bix Figure 4 16 6 Dual Image Information Page Screenshot 362 PLANET Networking amp Communication The page includes the following fields Object Flash Partition Image Name Image Size Created Time Description Display the current flash partition Display the current image name Display the current image size Display the created time 363 User s Manual of LRP 422CST PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 5 SWITCH OPERATION 5 1 Address Table The Switch is implemented with an address table This address table is composed of many entries Each entry is used to store the address information of some nodes on the network including MAC address port no etc This information comes from the learning process of Ethernet Switch 5 2 Learning When one packet comes in from any port the Switch will record the source address port number and the other related information in the address table This information will be used to decide either forwarding or filtering for future packets 5 3 Forwarding amp Filtering When one packet comes from some port of the Ethernet Switching it will also check the destination address besides the source address learning The Ethernet Switching will look up the address table for the destination address If not found this packet will be forwarded to all th
226. mation base MIB and network management protocol Network management stations NMSs Sometimes called consoles these devices execute management applications that monitor and control network elements Physically NMSs are usually engineering workstation caliber computers with fast CPUs megapixel color displays substantial memory and abundant disk space At least one NMS must be present in each managed environment Agents Agents are software modules that reside in network elements They collect and store management information such as the number of error packets received by a network element Management information base MIB A MIB is a collection of managed objects residing in a virtual information store Collections of related managed objects are defined in specific MIB modules Network management protocol A management protocol is used to convey management information between agents and NMSs SNMP is the Internet community s de facto standard management protocol SNMP Operations SNMP itself is a simple request response protocol NMSs can send multiple requests without receiving a response Get Allows the NMS to retrieve an object instance from the agent Set Allows the NMS to set values for object instances within an agent Trap Used by the agent to asynchronously inform the NMS of some event The SNMPv2 trap message is designed to replace the SNMPv1 trap message SNMP Community An SNMP community is the group that devices and man
227. me Ofer fom Od oeoo o Figure 4 2 9 Time Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Current Data Time Display the current data time e SNTP Display the current SNTP state e Time Zone Display the current time zone e Daylight Saving Time Display the current daylight saving time state e Daylight Saving Time Display the current daylight saving time offset state Offset e From Display the current daylight saving time from e To Display the current daylight saving time to 65 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 2 5 2 SNTP Server Settings The SNTP Server Configuration screens in Figure 4 2 10 amp Figure 4 2 11 appear SNTP Server Settings SNTP Server Settings Address AAA OF Hostname E 1 695939 Default 123 Figure 4 2 10 SNTP Setup Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e SNTP Server Address Type the IP address or domain name of the SNTP server e Server Port Type the port number of the SNTP Buttons Appl HEH Click to apply changes SNTP Server Informations Information Name Information Value SNTP Server Address SNTP Server Port Figure 4 2 11 SNTP Server Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e SNTP Server Address Display the current SNTP server address e Server Port Display the current SNTP serve
228. min hdr size Enable or disable DoS check mode by TCP syn sport lt 1024 Enable or disable DoS check mode by null scan attack Enable or disable DoS check mode by X mas scan attack Enable or disable DoS check mode by TCP syn fin attack Enable or disable DoS check mode by TCP syn rst attack Enable or disable DoS check mode by TCP fragment offset 1 286 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST DoS Informations Information Name Information Value IPv6 Ping Max Packet Size Enable 512 Bytes Smurf Attack Enable Netmask Length O IPv6 Min Fragment Size Enable 1240 Bytes TCP Min Header Length Enable 0 Bytes IPv4 Ping Max Packet Size Enable 512 Bytes Figure 4 9 68 DoS Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object DMAC SMAC Land Attach UDP Blat TCP Blat POD IPv6 Min Fragment ICMP Fragments IPv4 Ping Max Size IPv6 Ping Max Size Smurf Attack Description Display the current DMAC SMAC status Display the current land attach status Display the current UDP blat status Display the current TCP blat status Display the current POD status Display the current IPv6 min fragment status Display the current ICMP fragment status Display the current IPv4 ping max size status Display the current IPv6 ping max size status Display the current smurf attack status 287 PLANET e Networking amp Communication User s Manual
229. mn allows user to set the number of times system retries ping to PD For example if we set count 2 it means that if system retries ping to the PD and the PD doesn t response continuously the PoE port will be reset Allows user to set which action will be applied if the PD is without any response The PoE Switch offers the following 3 actions E PD Reboot It means system will reset the PoE port that is connected to the PD E PD Reboot amp Alarm It means system will reset the PoE port and issue an alarm message via Syslog SMTP E Alarm It means system will issue an alarm message via Syslog SMTP This column allows user to set the PoE device rebooting time as there are so many kinds of PoE devices on the market and they have a different rebooting time The PD Alive check is not a defining standard so the PoE device on the market doesn t report reboot done information to the PoE Switch Thus user has to make sure how long the PD will take to finish booting and then set the time value to this column System is going to check the PD again according to the reboot time If you are not sure of the precise booting time we suggest you set it longer Buttons Appl HE Click to apply changes 358 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 16 Maintenance Use the Maintenance menu items to display and configure basic configurations of the LRP Managed Switch Under maintenance the followin
230. mneneeltherenneioncineti pane iie eiri naii 67 e ES MOG Al WOO EE 67 2 O12 NOC AO EE 68 A20 EE e arch SOO Ane ene ere Eie a Oe eee ee ee ere eee ene 70 4 2 6 4 Log INISS LE 71 4 2 7 SNMP Management ZA e Ed e e 74 4 2 7 2 SNMP System Information sige iscoy nc5cusweddcdeves ester eocaiascueedievendieleeiescddesdecdsetieeebincesddeleetessoievandaniedeyenddebastiesens 75 4 2 1 3 SNMP eer ul UE 76 4 2 7 4 SNMP View ccc cece cece cece cece eect cece teen eee eee EEE EEE EEE EEE EEE EEE EEEEEEEEEEEEEEAEAAEEEEEEEEEEEEEAAEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEES 77 Ae SNMP ACCESS OUD EE 79 Eege 81 4 2 7 7 SNMPVv1 2 Notification Recipients ccc cecceeccceeceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeaeeeceeeteueeaneeteeeeeeeeaneesseeteeeeaeseeteneeaneeneeetanes 83 4 2 7 8 SNMPv3 Notification Recipients ccc eecccecccceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeaeeeeaeeceseeeeseeeeseecesscessueeeessaeetsueetsneeesaes 84 ER ENJINS ID ee 85 4 2 7 10 SNMP Remote Engine ID 86 43 PO Manage ment sessen a a EA Ra 88 Aa TT POCONO O EE 88 422 LRP Porn OTIC UO eee ge tsetse Se cere ce rae aa ea Seas oe a a eaa Ti 90 AS ONT OU Me cee states caesar setae dea wens ema ce eet sola ae eda eed oc E densa nneeesente 91 4 3 4 Bandwidth Utilization cccccccccccccceeceeeaeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeaaeesseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaaaaaaaaseeeeees 97 Bb dle ON IVI MINTO EE 98 ASO OMI EE 100 4 3 7 Port Error Disabled Configuration c
231. mpty TX RX packets e Empty Rx Tx Display the current empty TX RX packets e Leave Empty Rx Tx Display the current leave empty TX RX packets e Join In Rx Tx Display the current join in TX RX packets e Leave In Rx Tx Display the current leave in TX RX packets e LeaveAll Rx Tx Display the current leaveall TX RX packets 144 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST GVRP Port Error Statistics Clear Refresh Figure 4 5 19 GVRP Port Error Statistics Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Invalid Protocol ID Display the current invalid protocol ID e Invalid Attribute Type Display the current invalid attribute type e Invalid Attribute Value Display the current invalid attribute value e Invalid Attribute Display the current invalid attribute length Length e Invalid Event Display the current invalid event Buttons Clear Click to clear the GVRP Error Statistics Refresh Click to refresh the GVRP Error Statistics 145 PLANET lt Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 5 14 VLAN setting example Separate VLANs 802 1Q VLAN Trunk 4 5 14 1 Two Separate 802 1Q VLANs The diagram shows how the LRP Managed Switch handles Tagged and Untagged traffic flow for two VLANs VLAN Group 2 and VLAN Group 3 are separated VLANs Each VLAN isolates n
232. munication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 16 2 Reboot Switch The Reboot page enables the device to be rebooted from a remote location Once the Reboot button is pressed user has to re login the Web interface for about 60 seconds The Reboot Switch screen in Figure 4 16 2 appears and click to reboot the system Reboot Switch Reboot Figure 4 16 2 Reboot Switch Page Screenshot 4 16 3 Backup Manager This function allows backup of the current image or configuration of the LRP Managed Switch to the local management station The Backup Manager screen in Figure 4 16 3 appears Backup Manager Backup Manager Backup Method TFTP Ev or Pye Address Image Funning configuration Startup configuration Backup Configuration Flash log Buffered log O image 1 0b6150820 bix Active 1 00190820 bix Backup Backup Type Backup Figure 4 16 3 Backup Manager Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Backup Method Select backup method from this drop down list e Server IP Fill in your TFTP server IP address e Backup Type Select backup type e Image Select active or backup image Buttons Backup Click to back up image configuration or log 360 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 16 4 Upgrade Manager This function allows reloading of the current image or configuration of the LRP Managed Switch to the local management station
233. namic router ports e Expiry Time Sec Display the current expiry time Static Router Table VLAN ID PortMask Figure 4 7 30 Static Router Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID Display the current VLAN ID e Port Mask Display the current port mask Forbidden Router Table VLAN ID PortMask Figure 4 7 31 Forbidden Router Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID Display the current VLAN ID e Port Mask Display the current port mask 195 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 7 4 6 MLD Forward All This page provides MLD Forward All The Forward All screen in Figure 4 7 32 appears MLD Forward All Forward All YLAN ID 1 T Port Membership static Forbidden 5 Mone ot atic Forbidden Mone static Forbidden 5 None LAGS Static Forbidden Mone LAG4 Static Forbidden None Apply Figure 4 7 32 Forward All Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e VLAN ID Select VLAN ID from this drop down list to assign MLD membership e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Membership Select MLD membership for each interface Forbidden Interface is forbidden from automatically joining the MLD via MVR Interface is not a member of the VLAN Packets associated with this VLAN will not be transmitted
234. nces in electrical and electronic equipment end users of electrical and electronic equipment should understand the meaning of the crossed out wheeled bin symbol Do not dispose of WEEE as unsorted municipal waste and have to collect such WEEE separately Revision PLANET Industrial 4 port Coax 2 port 10 100 1000T 2 port 100 1000X SFP Long Reach PoE over Coaxial Managed Switch User s Manual For Model LRP 422CST Revision 1 0 September 2015 Part No EM LRP 422CST_v1 0 Networking H Co NET User s Manual of LRP 422CST TABLE OF CONTENTS De INTRO DG TION oosina oxy cas aesaeweuswcesccuciacetweusadussawsceweueusuceneusecsnucesueeeweusucssree 10 PP ACKEL COMENS aai EEE 10 1 2 Product DESCHDUO E 11 to Row to Use This Man al EE 17 EE 17 1 5 POGUE SDS Me Le TEE 20 2 INSTALLATION cere sere ewes renee eee eet ee veneered nein etna eenren ie eaenncenieeeneeniorss 24 2 Hardware Descriptio BE 24 Z Vel FY CADDIES IONS EE 24 CH i MOMMA E 25 Ee H RR ae Te Lei oeira A E E E E nden tea cemaiae de 26 2 14 SWITCH Upper EEN 28 2 1 5 Wining th FaultAlarm n LE 29 2 2 Installing the LRP Managed SwitCh sssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn mnnn 30 ANS A UO EE 30 2 2 2 DIN rail e rn ln e DEE 31 2 23 Wal mou nt Flate Ode ue e DEE 33 Pa eS C2 18 e EEN 35 2 2 5 Installing the SFP Transceiver ccccceeccecceeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeesseeeeseeeeees
235. ne profile can be assigned to a port When enabled multicast join reports received on the port are checked against the filter profile If a requested 200 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST multicast group is permitted the multicast join report is forwarded as normal If a requested multicast group is denied the multicast join report is dropped When you have created a Multicast profile number you can then configure the multicast groups to filter and set the access mode Command Usage e Each profile has only one access mode either permit or deny e When the access mode is set to permit multicast join reports are processed when a multicast group falls within the controlled range e When the access mode is set to deny multicast join reports are only processed when the multicast group is not in the controlled range 4 7 7 1 Multicast Profile Setting The Add Profile and Profile Status screens in Figure 4 7 36 amp Figure 4 7 37 appear Multicast Profile Setting Add Profile IP Type Du Profile Index 1 Group From Group To Action 2 Permit Deny Add Figure 4 7 36 Add Profile Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e IP Type Select IPv4 or IPv6 from this drop down list e Profile Index Indicates the ID of this particular profile e Group from Specifies multicast groups to include in the profile Specify a multicast group ra
236. neastPackts E ee 0 DETRESSE Reveied Broasca Packets E Figure 4 3 4 Interface Counters Page Screenshot Object Description e Received Octets The total number of octets received on the interface including framing characters e Received Unicast The number of subnetwork unicast packets delivered to a higher layer protocol Packets e Received Unknown The number of packets received via the interface which is discarded because of Unicast Packets an unknown or unsupported protocol e Received Discarded The number of inbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though Packets no errors had been detected to prevent their being deliverable to a higher layer protocol One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up buffer space e Transmit Octets The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface including framing characters e Transmit Unicast The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested is transmitted Packets to a subnetwork unicast address including those that were discarded or not sent 92 PLANET e A Networking amp Communication Ethernet like Counters Transmit Unknown Unicast Packets Transmit Discarded Packets Received Multicast Packets Received Broadcast Packets Transmit Multicast Packets Transmit Broadcast Packets User s Manual of LRP 422CST The total number of packets that higher level protocols requested is transmitted to a subnetwork
237. nfigured as link aggregation ports e None of the ports in a link aggregation can be configured as a mirror source port or a mirror target port e All of the ports in a link aggregation have to be treated as a whole when moved from to added or deleted from a VLAN e The Spanning Tree Protocol will treat all the ports in a link aggregation as a whole e Enable the link aggregation prior to connecting any cable between the switches to avoid creating a data loop e Disconnect all link aggregation port cables or disable the link aggregation ports before removing a port link aggregation to avoid creating a data loop It allows a maximum of 8 ports to be aggregated at the same time The LRP Managed Switch supports Gigabit Ethernet ports up to 8 groups If the group is defined as an LACP static link aggregation group then any extra ports selected are placed in a standby mode for redundancy if one of the other ports fails If the group is defined as a local static link aggregation group then the number of ports must be the same as the group member ports Use the Link Aggregation Menu to display or configure the Trunk function This section has the following items a LAG Setting Configures load balance algorithm configuration settings a LAG Management Configures LAG configuration settings a LAG Port Setting Configures LAG port settings E LACP Setting Configures LACP priority settings E LACP Port Setting Configures LACP configuration settings B
238. ng amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST BW crit Critical level of the critical conditions for local log error Error level of the error conditions for local log m warning Warning level of the warning conditions for local log WR notice Notice level of the normal but significant conditions for local log E info Informational level of the informational messages for local log E debug Debug level of the debugging messages for local log e Facility Local0 7 local user 0 7 Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Remote Logging Setting Status Figure 4 2 17 Remote Log Setting Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Status Display the current remote syslog state e Server Info Display the current remote syslog server information e Severity Display the current remote syslog severity e Facility Display the current remote syslog facility e Action Delete Delete the remote server entry 4 2 6 4 Log Message The switch log view is provided here The Log View screens in Figure 4 2 18 Figure 4 2 19 amp Figure 4 2 20 appear Logging Filter Select Target severity buffered Select Levels Select Categories M View Figure 4 2 18 Log Information Select Page Screenshot 71 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST The page includes the following fields Object Description e Target The target of the log v
239. ng SHA authentication protocol The value of security level cannot be modified if entry already exists That means you must first ensure that the value is set correctly e Authentication A string identifying the authentication pass phrase For both MD5 and SHA Password authentication protocol the allowed string length is 8 to 16 81 PLANET Networking amp Communication Buttons Add Encryption Protocol Encryption Key User s Manual of LRP 422CST Indicates the privacy protocol that this entry should belong to Possible privacy protocol are E None None privacy protocol S DES An optional flag to indicate that this user using DES authentication protocol A string identifying the privacy pass phrase The allowed string length is 8 to 16 Click to add a new user entry User Name Group Privilege Mode Authentication Protocol Encryption Protocol Access Right The page includes the following fields Figure 4 2 30 SNMPv3 Users Status Page Screenshot Object User Name Group Privilege Mode Authentication Protocol Encryption Protocol Access Right Action Description Display the current user name Display the current group Display the current privilege mode Display the current authentication protocol Display the current encryption protocol Display the current access right BE Delete the user entry 82 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4
240. ng fields Object Description e Port Display the current port e VLAN ID Display the current VLAN e MAC Address Display the current MAC address e IP Address Display the current IP Address e Type Display the current entry type e Lease Time Display the current lease time e Action Click Delete to delete IP source guard binding table status entry 282 PLANET Networking amp Communication 4 9 10 Port Security User s Manual of LRP 422CST This page allows you to configure the Port Security Limit Control system and port settings Limit Control allows for limiting the number of users on a given port A user is identified by a MAC address and VLAN ID If Limit Control is enabled on a port the limit specifies the maximum number of users on the port If this number is exceeded an action is taken The action can be one of the four as described below The Limit Control module is one of a range of modules that utilizes a lower layer module the Port Security module which manages MAC addresses learned on the port The Limit Control configuration consists of two sections a system and a port wide The IP Source Guard Static Binding Entry and Table Status screens in Figure 4 9 65 amp Figure 4 9 66 appear Port Security a PortSelect Select Apply Figure 4 9 65 Port Security Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object e Port e Security e Mac L2 Entry e Action Description Sel
241. ng modes are available E Drop E Keep E Replace Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Options Port Setting Enable Allow UnTrusted Disable Drop Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Drop Figure 4 9 49 Option 82 Global Setting Page Screenshot Drop Drop Drop Drop Drop Drop The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Enable Display the current status e Allow Untrusted Display the current untrusted mode 270 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 9 7 10 Option 82 Circuit ID Setting Set creation method for option 82 users can define the parameters of circuit id suboption by themselves Option 82 Circuit ID Setting screens in Figure 4 9 50 amp Figure 4 9 51 appear Option s2 Port Circuit ID Setting Options2 Port Circuit ID Setting Circuit ID Select Ports e Default User Define Apply Figure 4 9 50 Option 82 Port Circuit ID Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select port for this drop down list e VLAN Indicates the ID of this particular VLAN e Circuit ID Set the option1 Circuit ID content of option 82 added by DHCP request packets Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Option Port Setting Figure 4 9 51 Option 82 Port Circuit ID Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fi
242. ng state E ATTACH means attach state mM CLLCT means collecting state E DSTRBT means distributing state e Receiv LACP receive state machine status of the port E INIT means the port is in initialize state E PORTdS means port disabled state E EXPR means expired state E LACPds means LACP disabled state E DELT means defaulted state E CRRNT means current state e PrdTx LACP periodic transmission state machine status of the port E no PRD means the port is in no periodic state E FstPRD means fast periodic state WR SlwPRD means slow periodic state E PrdTX means periodic TX state e AtState The actor state field of LACP PDU description The field from left to right describes LACP_ Activity LACH Timeout Aggregation Synchronization Collecting Distributing Defaulted and 120 PLANET Networking amp Communication e PnState User s Manual of LRP 422CST Expired The contents could be true or false If the contents are false the web shows _ if the contents are true the web shows A T G S C D F and E for each content respectively The partner state field of LACP PDU description The field from left to right describes LACP_ Activity LACH Timeout 7 D Aggregation 7 19 7 D Synchronization Collecting Distributing
243. nge If you want to filter a specific source port range filter with this ACE you can enter a specific source port range value A field for entering a source port value appears The allowed range is 0 to 65535 A frame that hits this ACE matches this source port value e Destination Port Specify the destination port for this ACE Any No specific destination port is specified destination port status is don t care Single If you want to filter a specific destination port with this ACE you can enter a specific destination port value A field for entering a destination port value appears The allowed range is 0 to 65535 Aframe that hits this ACE matches this destination port value Range If you want to filter a specific destination port range filter with this ACE you can enter a specific destination port range value A field for entering a destination port value appears e TCP Flags UGR Specify the TCP Urgent Pointer field significant URG value for this ACE E Set TCP frames where the URG field is set must be able to match this entry E Unset TCP frames where the URG field is set must not be able to match this entry WR Don t Care Any value is allowed don t care ACK Specify the TCP Acknowledgment field significant ACK value for this ACE E Set TCP frames where the ACK field is set must be able to match this entry E Unset TCP frames where the ACK field is set must not be able to match this entry W
244. nge by entering a start IP address e Group to Specifies multicast groups to include in the profile Specify a multicast group range by entering an end IP address 201 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST e Action Sets the access mode of the profile either permit or deny Multicast join reports are processed when a multicast group falls within the controlled range Deny When the access mode is set to multicast join reports are only processed when the multicast group is not in the controlled range Buttons Add Click to add multicast profile entry IGMP Profile Status Figure 4 7 37 IGMP MLD Profile Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Index Display the current index e IP Type Display the current IP Type e Group from Display the current group from e Group to Display the current group to e Action Display the current action Modif i y Click Edit to edit parameter click BSBA to delete the MLD IGMP profile entry 202 PLANET Networking A Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 7 7 2 IGMP Filter Setting The Filter Setting and Status screens in Figure 4 7 38 amp Figure 4 7 39 appear Filter Setting Port Select Filter Profile ID Select Pors gt Apply Figure 4 7 38 Filter Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select Select port numbe
245. ngth excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and had either an FCS or alignment error The total number of frames received that were longer than 1518 octets excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and had either an FCS or alignment error The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment The total number of frames including bad packets received and transmitted that were 64 octets in length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets The total number of frames including bad packets received and transmitted where the number of octets falls within the specified range excluding framing bits but including FCS octets 96 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 3 4 Bandwidth Utilization The Bandwidth Utilization page displays the percentage of the total available bandwidth being used on the ports Bandwidth utilization statistics can be viewed using a line graph The Bandwidth Utilization screen in Figure 4 3 7 appears To view the port utilization click on the Port Management folder and then the Bandwidth Utilization link Port Bandwidth Utilization W ceps Poombps PB tomeps Dink Down Refresh period 5 IFG Enable Figure 4 3 7 Port Bandwidth Utilization Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Refresh Period This shows the period interval between last and next refresh Options E 2s
246. o methods to install the LRP Managed Switch DIN rail mounting and wall mount plate mounting Please read the following topics and perform the procedures in the order being presented Follow all the DIN rail installation steps as shown in the example Step 1 Screw the DIN rail on the LRP Managed Switch Step 2 Lightly slide the DIN rail into the track 31 PLANET User s Manual of LRP 422CST 32 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST Step 3 Check whether the DIN rail is tightly on the track Please refer to the following procedures to remove the LRP Managed Switch from the track Step 4 Lightly remove the DIN rail from the track 2 2 3 Wall mount Plate Mounting To install the LRP Managed Switch on the wall please follow the instructions below Follow all the DIN rail installation steps as shown in the example 33 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST Step 1 Remove the DIN rail from the LRP Managed Switch Use the screwdriver to loosen the screws to remove the DIN rail Step 2 Place the wall mount plate on the rear panel of the LRP Managed Switch Step 3 Use the screwdriver to screw the wall mount plate on the LRP Managed Switch Step 4 Use the hook holes at the corners of the wall mount plate to hang the LRP Managed Switch on the wall Step 5 To remove the wall mount plate reverse the steps above
247. oE BNC Interface BNC female port 5C2V RG6 75Q coaxial cable Up to 1 kilometer Mi Gigabit TP Interface 10 100 1000BASE T Copper RJ45 Twisted pair Up to 100 meters HM 100 1000BASE X SFP Slots Each of the SFP Small Form factor Pluggable slots supports dual speed 1000BASE SX LX or 100BASE FX For 1000BASE SX LX SFP transceiver module From 550 meters multi mode fiber to 10 30 50 70 120 kilometers single mode fiber For 100BASE FX SFP transceiver module From 2 kilometers multi mode fiber to 20 40 60 kilometers single mode fiber WW Console Port The console port is a RJ45 port connector It is an interface for connecting a terminal directly Through the console port it 25 PLANET Gier User s Manual of LRP 422CST provides rich diagnostic information including IP Address setting factory reset port management link status and system setting Users can use the attached DB9 to RJ45 console cable in the package and connect to the console port on the device After the connection users can run any terminal emulation program Hyper Terminal ProComm Plus Telix Winterm and so on to enter the startup screen of the device Mi Reset Button On the left of the front panel the reset button is designed to reboot the LRP Managed Switch without turning off and on the power The following is the summary table of the Reset button functions Reset Button Pressed and Released Function lt 5 sec System Reboot Reboot the L
248. obally enabled or disabled on the switch If globally disabled all ports are allowed forwarding of frames Buttons Appl HE Click to apply changes 807 14 Informations Figure 4 9 4 802 1X Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e 802 1X Display the current 802 1X state 232 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 9 1 3 802 1X Port Setting This page allows you to configure the IEEE 802 1X Port Setting The 802 1X Port Setting screens in Figure 4 9 5 amp Figure 4 9 6 appear 802 1x Port Setting Select Ports L i No Authentication ha nabl Disable Enable ion Period 360 Range 30 65535 Default 3600 o Range 0 65535 Default 60 eriod 30 Sange 1 65535 Default 303 Request Retries 2 Range 1 10 Default 2 Figure 4 9 5 802 1X Port Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select port from this drop down list e Mode If NAS is globally enabled this selection controls the port s authentication mode The following modes are available E No Authentication E Authentication E Force Authorized In this mode the switch will send one EAPOL Success frame when the port link comes up and any client on the port will be allowed network access without authentication E Force Unauthorized In this mode the switch will send one EAPOL Fa
249. ocol VLAN port setting Setting a GVRP Setting Configures GVRP global setting E GVRP Port Setting Configures GVRP port setting E GVRP VLAN Displays the GVRP VLAN database a GVRP Statistics Displays the GVRP port statistics 4 5 2 IEEE 802 1Q VLAN In large networks routers are used to isolate broadcast traffic for each subnet into separate domains This LRP Managed Switch provides a similar service at Layer 2 by using VLANs to organize any group of network nodes into separate broadcast domains VLANs confine broadcast traffic to the originating group and can eliminate broadcast storms in large networks This also provides a more secure and cleaner network environment An IEEE 802 1Q VLAN is a group of ports that can be located anywhere in the network but communicate as though they belong to the same physical segment VLANs help to simplify network management by allowing you to move devices to a new VLAN without having to change any physical connections VLANs can be easily organized to reflect departmental groups such as Marketing or R amp D usage groups such as e mail or multicast groups used for multimedia applications such as videoconferencing VLANs provide greater network efficiency by reducing broadcast traffic and allow you to make network changes without having to update IP addresses or IP subnets VLANs inherently provide a high level of network security since traffic must pass through a configured Layer 3 link to reach a
250. ol Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Port State Display the current port state e Broadcast Kbps pps Display the current broadcast storm control rate Unknown Multicast Display the current unknown multicast storm control rate Kbps pps Unknown Unicast Display the current unknown unicast storm control rate Kbps pps Action Display the current action 292 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 10 ACL ACL is an acronym for Access Control List It is the list table of ACEs containing access control entries that specify individual users or groups permitted or denied to specific traffic objects such as a process or a program Each accessible traffic object contains an identifier to its ACL The privileges determine whether there are specific traffic object access rights ACL implementations can be quite complex for example when the ACEs are prioritized for the various situation In networking the ACL refers to a list of service ports or network services that are available on a host or server each with a list of hosts or servers permitted or denied to use the service ACL can generally be configured to control inbound traffic and in this context they are similar to firewalls ACE is an acronym for Access Control Entry It describes access permission associated with a particular ACE ID T
251. ommunication User s Manual of LRP 422CST Mirror Setting Mirror Setting Figure 4 3 9 Port Mirroring Settings Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Session ID Set the port mirror session ID Possible ID are 1 to 4 e Monitor Session State Enable or disable the port mirroring function e Destination Port Select the port to mirror destination port e Allow ingress Frames from ports that have either source RX or destination TX mirroring enabled are mirrored to this port e Sniffer TX Ports Frames transmitted from these ports are mirrored to the mirroring port Frames received are not mirrored e Sniffer RX Ports Frames received at these ports are mirrored to the mirroring port Frames transmitted are not mirrored Buttons Apply Click to apply changes 99 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST Mirror Status Figure 4 3 10 Mirroring Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Session ID Display the session ID e Destination Port This is the mirroring port entry e Ingress State Display the ingress state e Source TX Port Display the current TX ports e Source RX Port Display the current RX ports 4 3 6 Jumbo Frame This page provides to select the maximum frame size allowed for the switch port The Jumbo Frame screens in Figure 4 3 11 amp Figure 4 3 12 app
252. ommunication User s Manual of LRP 422CST Scheduled Power Recycling The LRP 422CST allows each of the connected PoE IP cameras or PoE wireless access points via the LRP 101CE Long Reach PoE Extender to reboot at a specific time each week Therefore it will reduce the chance of IP camera or wireless AP crash Ps Automatically Reboot SM Every Friday 23 00 resulting from buffer overflow eme T E d W E E D E J i PoE i KA SA Een ON OFF ON PoE PT Camera PoE Schedule for Energy Saving Under the trend of energy saving worldwide and contributing to environmental protection the LRP 422CST can effectively control the power supply besides its capability of giving high watts power The PoE schedule function helps you to enable or disable PoE power feeding for each PoE port during specified time intervals and it is a powerful function to help SMBs or enterprises save power and budget It also increases security by powering off PDs that should not be in use during non business hours als bk e D Of OI BAN duh 5PM SPH BAN wie ef K a 6 Watts D Watts 1 Watts L Watts a Kc 2 Power Power Power Ka SE Ee Ee te Watts Watts 12 Watts 1 Watt P Save 24 watts hr during off business hours Total consumption of 36 watts hr Total Saved 10800 Watts month PoE Usage Monitoring Via the power usage chart in the web management interface the LRP 422CST
253. one router switch on the LAN performing IP multicasting one of these devices is elected querier and assumes the role of querying the LAN for group members It then propagates the service requests on to any upstream multicast switch router to ensure that it will continue to receive the multicast service Multicast routers use this information along with a multicast routing protocol such as DVMRP or PIM to support IP multicasting across the Internet Note 177 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 7 2 1 IGMP Setting This page provides IGMP Snooping related configuration Most of the settings are global whereas the Router Port configuration is related to the current unit as reflected by the page header The IGMP Snooping Setting and Information screens in Figure 4 7 7 Figure 4 7 8 amp Figure 4 7 9 appear IGMP Snooping ISMP Snooping Figure 4 7 7 IGMP Snooping Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e IGMP Snooping Status Enable or disable the IGMP snooping The default value is Disabled e IGMP Snooping Version Sets the IGMP Snooping operation version Possible versions are E v2 Set IGMP Snooping supported IGMP version 2 M v3 Set IGMP Snooping supported IGMP version 3 e IGMP Snooping Report Limits the membership report traffic sent to multicast capable routers Suppression When you disable report suppression all IGMP reports ar
254. ontains information about how long the information in the LLDP frame shall be considered valid The LLDP information valid period is set to Holdtime multiplied by Transmission Interval seconds Valid values are restricted to 2 10 times TTL in seconds is based on the following rule Transmission Interval Holdtime Multiplier lt 65536 Therefore the default TTL is 4 30 120 seconds When a port is disabled LLDP is disabled or the switch is rebooted a LLDP shutdown frame is transmitted to the neighboring units signaling that the LLDP information isn t valid anymore TX Reinit controls the amount of seconds between the shutdown frame and a new LLDP initialization Valid values are restricted to 1 10 seconds If some configuration is changed e g the IP address a new LLDP frame is transmitted but the time between the LLDP frames will always be at least the value of Transmit Delay seconds Transmit Delay cannot be larger than 1 4 of the Transmission Interval value Valid values are restricted to 1 8192 seconds This attribute must comply with the rule 4 Delay Interval lt Transmission Interval Configures the amount of LLDP MED Fast Start LLDPDUs to transmit during the activation process of the LLDP MED Fast Start mechanism Range 1 10 packets Default 3 packets The MED Fast Start Count parameter is part of the timer which ensures that the LLDP MED Fast Start mechanism is active for the port LLDP MED Fast Start is
255. or a port or trunk 133 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST Forbidden Interface is forbidden from automatically joining the VLAN via GVRP Interface is not a member of the VLAN Packets associated with this VLAN will not be transmitted by the interface Tagged Interface is a member of the VLAN All packets transmitted by the port will be tagged that is carry a tag and therefore carry VLAN or CoS information Untagged Interface is a member of the VLAN All packets transmitted by the port will be untagged that is not carry a tag and therefore not carry VLAN or CoS information Note that an interface must be assigned to at least one group as an untagged port e PVID Display the current PVID Buttons Appl PPY Click to apply changes 134 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 5 7 Port VLAN Membership This page provides an overview of membership status for VLAN users The VLAN Membership Status screen in Figure 4 5 8 appears Port VLAN Membership Port VLAN Membership Table Modify Port Mode Administrative VLANs Operational VL FEI Trunk J UP al I a ag CS dbs tA FES Trunk TJP TUR RES Trunk TUR TOUR FEA Trunk Por OTe GEI Trunk TUR POR 5 ES Trunk TJP TOE EIS Trunk TOR THS GEA Trunk J UP TOR LAG Trunk TUR LHE LAG Trunk TJP TIE LAG Trunk TUP TUR LAG Trunk TJP 1P Figure 4 5 8 Port VLAN Memb
256. orbidden Interface is forbidden from automatically joining the IGMP via MVR Interface is not a member of the VLAN Packets associated with this VLAN will not be transmitted by the interface Interface is a member of the IGMP 186 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST Buttons Appl HEH Click to apply changes 4 7 3 IGMP Snooping Statics This page provides IGMP Snooping Statics The IGMP Snooping Statics screen in Figure 4 7 20 appears ISMP Snooping Statistics IGMP Snooping Statistics Clear Refresh C id e Repo ER C id Special orou GuaryRX O ooo o EECHER lewd Repo id Genel eye id Special oro Quay eid Special Group amp Sowee Guay x o Figure 4 7 20 Forward All Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Total RX Display current total RX 187 PLANET lt Networking amp Communication Buttons lear Refresh Valid RX Invalid RX Other RX Leave RX Report RX General Query RX Special Group Query RX Special Group amp Source Query RX Leave TX Report TX General Query TX Special Group Query TX Special Group amp Source Query TX User s Manual of LRP 422CST Display current valid RX Display current invalid RX Display current other RX Display current leave RX Display current report RX Display current general query RX Display current special group query RX Display cur
257. ort status is don t care DSCP If you want to filter a specific DSCP with this ACE you can enter a specific DSCP value A field for entering a DSCP value appears The allowed range is 0 to 63 A frame that hits this ACE matches this DSCP value IP Precedence If you want to filter a specific IP precedence with this ACE you can enter a specific IP precedence value A field for entering a IP precedence value appears The allowed range is 0 to 7 Aframe that hits this ACE matches this IP precedence value Specify the ICMP for this ACE Any No specific ICMP is specified destination port status is don t care List If you want to filter a specific list with this ACE you can select a specific list value Protocol ID If you want to filter a specific protocol ID filter with this ACE you can enter a specific protocol ID value A field for entering a protocol ID value appears The allowed range is 0 to 255 A frame that hits this ACE matches this protocol ID value Specify the ICMP code filter for this ACE Any No ICMP code filter is specified ICMP code filter status is don t care User Defined If you want to filter a specific ICMP code filter with this ACE you can enter a specific ICMP code value A field for entering an ICMP code value appears The allowed range is 0 to 255 A frame that hits this ACE matches this ICMP code value 307 PLANET Networking amp Communication Buttons Add Click to add ACE list
258. otocol can be used to detect and disable network loops and to provide backup links between switches bridges or routers This allows the switch to interact with other bridging devices in your network to ensure that only one route exists between any two stations on the network and provide backup links which automatically take over when a primary link goes down The spanning tree algorithms supported by this switch include these versions a STP Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1D a RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1w a MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1s The IEEE 802 1D Spanning Tree Protocol and IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol allow for the blocking of links between switches that form loops within the network When multiple links between switches are detected a primary link is established Duplicated links are blocked from use and become standby links The protocol allows for the duplicate links to be used in the event of a failure of the primary link Once the Spanning Tree Protocol is configured and enabled primary links are established and duplicated links are blocked automatically The reactivation of the blocked links at the time of a primary link failure is also accomplished automatically without operator intervention This automatic network reconfiguration provides maximum uptime to network users However the concepts of the Spanning Tree Algorithm and protocol are a complicated and complex s
259. ou can plug in and out the coaxial cable to from any BNC female port without having to power down the LRP Managed Switch Approved PLANET Long Reach PoE Extenders The following list of approved PLANET Long Reach PoE extenders is correct at the time of publication Long Reach Ethernet Coaxial Extenders S LRP 101CE 1 Port 10 100TX PoE PSE 1 Port Coax Long Reach PoE Extender It is recommended to use PLANET Long Reach Ethernet coaxial extenders on the LRP Managed Switch If you insert a coaxial extender that is not supported the LRP Managed Switch may damage it de Before we connect LRP Managed Switch to the other network device we have to make sure both sides of the Long Reach Ethernet coaxial extender transceiver are with the same media type 2 Check whether the coaxial cable type matches with the Long Reach Ethernet coaxial extender transceiver requirement gt Toconnect to LRP Managed Switch please use the coaxial cable with 759 BNC plug with one side being the BNC plug connector type gt To connect to Long Reach Ethernet coaxial extenders please use the coaxial cable with one side being the 759 BNC plug connector type Because there are various resistance values in the category of RG 59 U or RG 6 U cables please take care of the conditions of the resistance value of cables as follows Coaxial Cable Type RG 59 U Less than 30 2 1000 ft RG 6 U Less than 12 2 1000 ft In the installation steps below this
260. outers The default is enabled Buttons Appl PPY Click to apply changes 189 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST MLD Snooping Informations Information Name Information Value MLD Snooping Status MLD Snooping Version MLD Snooping V2 Report Suppression Figure 4 7 22 MLD Snooping information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e MLD Snooping Status Display the current MLD snooping status e MLD Snooping Version Display the current MLD snooping version e MLD Snooping Report Display the current MLD snooping report suppression Suppression MLD Snooping Table Last Entry VLAN Snooping Ports Query Member Member Immediate No ID Operation Auto Robustness Interval sec Query Leave i Interval sec o e oee femp fe EE Figure 4 7 23 MLD Snooping Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Entry No Display the current entry number e VLAN ID Display the current VLAN ID e MLD Snooping Operation Display the current MLD snooping operation status Status e Router Ports Auto Learn Display the current router ports auto learning 190 PLANET Networking amp Communication 4 7 4 2 Query Robustness Query Interval sec Query Max Response Interval sec Last Member Query count Last Member Query Interval sec Immediate Leave Modify MLD Static Group
261. ower Used shows how much power the PD currently is using e Power Allocation It can limit the port PoE supply watts Per port maximum value must be less than 30 8 watts Total port values must be less than the Power Reservation value Once power overload is detected the port will auto shut down and keep in detection mode until PD s power consumption is lower than the power limit value Buttons Appl PPly Click to apply changes 4 15 4 PoE Schedule This page allows the user to define PoE schedule and scheduled power recycling PoE Schedule Besides being used as an IP Surveillance the Managed PoE switch is certainly applicable to construct any PoE network including VoIP and Wireless LAN Under the trend of energy saving worldwide and contributing to the environmental protection on the Earth the Managed PoE switch can effectively control the power supply besides its capability of giving high watts power The PoE schedule function helps you to enable or disable PoE power feeding for each PoE port during specified time intervals and it is a powerful function to help SMB or Enterprise save power and money i i ay i 7 1 Power Power Power Power OHT GN Oe Or 6 Watts Watts L3 Watts 12 Watts D Watts 6 Watts 12 Watts L Watts Save 24 watts hr during off business hours Total consumption of 36 watts hr Total Saved 10800 Watts month TJOO0Bazp T UTP with PoE Scheduled Power Recycling The Managed PoE s
262. page includes the following fields Object Description e Protected Ports Display the current protected ports e Unprotected Ports Display the current unprotected ports 106 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 3 10 EEE What is EEE EEE is a power saving option that reduces the power usage when there is low or no traffic utilization EEE works by powering down circuits when there is no traffic When a port gets data to be transmitted all circuits are powered up The time it takes to power up the circuits is named wakeup time The default wakeup time is 17 us for 1Gbit links and 30 us for other link speeds EEE devices must agree upon the value of the wakeup time in order to make sure that both the receiving and transmitting device has all circuits powered up when traffic is transmitted The devices can exchange wakeup time information using the LLDP protocol EEE works for ports in auto negotiation mode where the port is negotiated to either 1G or 100 Mbit full duplex mode For ports that are not EEE capable the corresponding EEE checkboxes are grayed out and thus impossible to enable EEE for The EEE port settings relate to the currently unit as reflected by the page header When a port is powered down for saving power outgoing traffic is stored in a buffer until the port is powered up again Because there are some overhead in turning the port down and up more power can be saved if the traffic can be
263. plies to all private VLANs When traffic comes in on a promiscuous port in a private VLAN the VLAN mask from the VLAN table is applied When traffic comes in on an isolated port the private VLAN mask is applied in addition to the VLAN mask from the VLAN table This reduces the ports to which forwarding can be done to just the promiscuous ports within the private VLAN The port settings relate to the currently unit as reflected by the page header The Port Isolation Configuration screens in Figure 4 3 16 amp Figure 4 3 17 appear 105 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST Protected Ports Settings Port List Port Type Select Protected Pore Unprotected Protected Apply Figure 4 3 16 Protected Ports Settings Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port List Select port number from this drop down list e Port Type Displays protected port types Protected A single stand alone VLAN that contains one promiscuous port and one or more isolated or host ports This VLAN conveys traffic between the isolated ports and a lone promiscuous port Unprotected A promiscuous port can communicate with all the interfaces within a private VLAN This is the default setting Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Protected Ports Status Protected Parts Unprotected Parts ail Figure 4 3 17 Port Isolation Status Page Screenshot The
264. priority that will be applied to traffic 2 Apply a classifier to determine how the incoming traffic will be classified and thus treated by the Switch 3 Create a QoS profile which associates a service level and a classifier 4 Apply a QoS profile to a port s The QoS page of the LRP Managed Switch contains three types of QoS mode the 802 1p mode DSCP mode or Port base mode can be selected Both the three mode rely on predefined fields within the packet to determine the output queue a 802 1p Tag Priority Mode The output queue assignment is determined by the IEEE 802 1p VLAN priority tag a IP DSCP Mode The output queue assignment is determined by the TOS or DSCP field in the IP packets a Port Base Priority Mode Any packet received from the specify high priority port will treated as a high priority packet The LRP Managed Switch supports eight priority level queue the queue service rate is based on the WRR Weight Round Robin and WFQ Weighted Fair Queuing alorithm The WRR ratio of high priority and low priority can be set to 4 1 and 8 1 205 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 8 2 General 4 8 2 1 QoS Properties The QoS Global Setting and Information screen in Figure 4 8 1 amp Figure 4 8 2 appear QoS Global Setting Apply Figure 4 8 1 QoS Global Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e QoS Mode Enable or d
265. r a defined Daylight Saving Time duration Select Disable to disable the Daylight Saving Time configuration Select Recurring and configure the Daylight Saving Time duration to repeat the configuration every year Select Non Recurring and configure the Daylight Saving Time duration for single time configuration Default Disabled Enter the number of minutes to add during Daylight Saving Time Range 1 to 1440 e Week Select the starting week number e Day Select the starting day e Month Select the starting month e Hours Select the starting hour e Minutes Select the starting minute e Week Select the starting week number e Day Select the starting day e Month Select the starting month e Hours Select the starting hour e Minutes Select the starting minute e Week Select the starting week number e Day Select the starting day e Month Select the starting month e Hours Select the starting hour e Minutes Select the starting minute e Week Select the starting week number e Day Select the starting day 64 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST e Month Select the starting month e Hours Select the starting hour e Minutes Select the starting minute Buttons Appl HE Click to apply changes System Time Informations Current Date Time UA 22 07 weblUTC 0 Jan 01 2000 TimeZone dT vee Daylight Saving Ti
266. r disable the trust mode Buttons Apply Click to apply changes O05 Port Status P T Oft Trust Type Figure 4 8 15 QoS Port Status Page Screenshot 217 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Trust Mode Display the current trust type 4 8 4 Rate Limit Configure the switch port rate limit for the switch port on this page 4 8 4 1 Ingress Bandwidth Control This page provides to select the ingress bandwidth preamble The Ingress Bandwidth Control Setting and Status screens in Figure 4 8 16 amp Figure 4 8 17 appear Ingress Bandwidth Control Ingress Bandwidth Control Settings Select Ports sl Disable Enable 16 1000000 Apply Figure 4 8 16 Ingress Bandwidth Control Settings Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select port number from this drop down list e State Enable or disable the port rate policer The default value is Disabled e Rate Kbps Configure the rate for the port policer The default value is unlimited Valid values are in the range 0 to 1000000 Buttons Appl PPY Click to apply changes 218 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST Ingress Bandwidth Control Status Ingress RateLimit Kbps Figure 4 8 17 Ingre
267. r from this drop down list e Filter Profile ID Select filter profile ID from this drop down list Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Port Filter Status Figure 4 7 39 Port Filter Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Display the current port e Filter Profile ID Display the current filter profile ID Action i i Click Show to display detail profile parameter Click Delete to delete the IGMP filter profile entry 203 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 7 7 3 MLD Filter Setting The Filter Setting and Status screens in Figure 4 7 40 amp Figure 4 7 41 appear Filter Setting Port Select Filter Profile ID Select Pors gt Apply Figure 4 7 40 Filter Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select Select port number from this drop down list e Filter Profile ID Select filter profile ID from this drop down list Buttons Apply Click to apply changes PS Port Filter Status Pan Filter Profile ID Figure 4 7 41 Port Filter Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Display the current port e Filter Profile ID Display the current filter profile ID e Action Click Show to display detail profile parameter Click Delete to delete the MLD filter profile entry 204 PLANET Networking amp Comm
268. r or connect this end to any non PLANET LRP equipment 27 Z P Ke 43 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 3 SWITCH MANAGEMENT This chapter explains the methods that you can use to configure management access to the LRP Managed Switch It describes the types of management applications and the communication and management protocols that deliver data between your management device workstation or personal computer and the system It also contains information about port connection options This chapter covers the following topics Requirements Management Access Overview Administration Console Access Web Management Access SNMP Access Standards Protocols and Related Reading 3 1 Requirements a Workstations running Windows 2000 XP 2003 Vista 7 8 2008 MAC OS9 or later Linux UNIX or other platforms are compatible with TCP IP protocols Workstation is installed with Ethernet NIC Network Interface Card E Serial Port connect Terminal e The above PC with COM Port DB9 RS232 or USB to RS232 converter a Ethernet Port connection e Network cables Use standard network UTP cables with RJ45 connectors E The above Workstation is installed with Web browser and JAVA runtime environment plug in It is recommended to use Internet Explore 8 0 or above to access LRP Managed Switch 44 PLANET Networking amp Communication 3 2 Management Access Overview User
269. r port 66 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 2 6 Log Management The LRP Managed Switch log management is provided here The local logs allow you to configure and limit system messages that are logged to flash or RAM memory The default is for event levels 0 to 3 to be logged to flash and levels 0 to 6 to be logged to RAM The following table lists the event levels of the LRP Managed Switch Severity Level Description Name Debugging messages Informational Informational messages only Notice Normal but significant condition such as cold start Warning Warning conditions e g return false unexpected return Error Error conditions eg invalid input default used Critical Critical conditions e g memory allocation or free memory error resource exhausted Wen Immediate action needed System unusable 4 2 6 1 Local Log The switch system local log information is provided here The local Log screens in Figure 4 2 12 amp Figure 4 2 13 appear Logging Settings Logging Settings Enable Disable Figure 4 2 12 Logging Settings Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Logging Service Enabled Enable logging service operation Disabled Disable logging service operation Buttons SR Click to apply changes 67 PLANET Networking A Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST Logging Information Info
270. r the port policer The default value is unlimited Valid values are in the range 1 to 300 Buttons Appl PPY Click to apply changes DHCP Rate Limit Config Rate Limit pps FE Unlimited FED Unlimited EES Unlimited FEA Unlimited GEI Unlimited GE Unlimited GES Unlimited eng o Figure 4 9 45 DHCP Rate Limit Setting Page Screenshot 267 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Rate Limit pps Display the current rate limit 4 9 7 8 Option 82 Global Setting DHCP provides a relay mechanism for sending information about the switch and its DHCP clients to DHCP servers Known as DHCP Option 82 it allows compatible DHCP servers to use the information when assigning IP addresses or to set other services or policies for clients It is also an effective tool in preventing malicious network attacks from attached clients on DHCP services such as IP Spoofing Client Identifier Spoofing MAC Address Spoofing and Address Exhaustion The DHCP option 82 enables a DHCP relay agent to insert specific information into a DHCP request packets when forwarding client DHCP packets to a DHCP server and remove the specific information from a DHCP reply packets when forwarding server DHCP packets to a DHCP client The DHCP server can use this information to implement IP address or other assi
271. r their internal VLAN IDs and number of VLANs supported VLAN ranges required by different customers in the same service provider network might easily overlap and traffic passing through the infrastructure might be mixed Assigning a unique range of VLAN IDs to each customer would restrict customer configurations require intensive processing of VLAN mapping tables and could easily exceed the maximum VLAN limit of 4096 Backbone Op Tore Core Switch Uer Tiang MAN Edge Switch 1000Base T UTP p I 1 000Base X LX Fiber optic The LRP Managed Switch supports multiple VLAN tags and can therefore be used in MAN applications as a provider bridge aggregating traffic from numerous independent customer LANs into the MAN Metro Access Network space One of the purposes of the provider bridge is to recognize and use VLAN tags so that the VLANs in the MAN space can be used independent of the customers VLANs This is accomplished by adding a VLAN tag with a MAN related VID for frames entering the MAN When leaving the MAN the tag is stripped and the original VLAN tag with the customer related VID is again available This provides a tunneling mechanism to connect remote costumer VLANs through a common MAN space without interfering with the VLAN tags All tags use EtherType 0x8100 or 0x88A8 where 0x8100 is used for customer tags and 0x88A8 are used for service provider tags In cases where a given service VLAN onl
272. ration Protocol GVRP defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to register VLAN members on ports across the network GVRP enabled Switches VLAN Table AA t d sSwitch B Switch A GVRP Enable GVRP Enable owitch A New VLAN ID Manually Added VLAN Table VLAN Table VLAN 20 GVRP Joins packet Switeh A VID 20 GVRP Enable GVRP Enable New VLAN Manually Added VIBD 20 VLAN Table gt VLAN Table VLAN 1 VLAN 1 VLAN 20 Switch B Switch A GVRP Enable GVRP Enable VLANs are dynamically configured based on join messages issued by host devices and propagated throughout the network GVRP must be enabled to permit automatic VLAN registration and to support VLANs which extend beyond the local switch The GVRP Global Setting Information screens in Figure 4 5 13 amp Figure 4 5 14 appear GVRP Setting GVRP Global Setting Figure 4 5 13 GVRP Global Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields 139 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST Object Description e GVRP Controls whether GVRP is enabled or disabled on this switch e Join Timeout The interval between transmitting requests queries to participate in a VLAN group Range 20 16375 centiseconds Default 20 centiseconds e Leave Timeout The interval a port waits before leaving a VLAN group This time should be set to more than twice the join time This ensures that af
273. rded e Chaddr Check Dropped Display the chaddr check dropped e Untrusted Port Dropped Display untrusted port dropped e Untrusted Port with Option82 Dropped Display untrusted port with option82 dropped e Invalid Dropped Display invalid dropped Buttons Clear l o Click to clear the statistics Refresh l Click to refresh the statistics 264 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 9 7 6 Database Agent Overview of the DHCP Snooping Database Agent When DHCP snooping is enabled the switch uses the DHCP snooping binding database to store information about untrusted interfaces The database can have up to 8192 bindings Each database entry binding has an IP address an associated MAC address the lease time in hexadecimal format the interface to which the binding applies and the VLAN to which the interface belongs A checksum value the end of each entry is the number of bytes from the start of the file to end of the entry Each entry is 72 bytes followed by a space and then the checksum value To keep the bindings when the switch reloads you must use the DHCP snooping database agent If the agent is disabled dynamic ARP or IP source guard is enabled and the DHCP snooping binding database has dynamic bindings the switch loses its connectivity If the agent is disabled and only DHCP snooping is enabled the switch does not lose its connectivity but DHCP snooping might not preven
274. re and view the system information This section has the following items HM System Information The switch system information is provided here IP Configurations Configure the switch managed IP information on this page IPv6 Configuration Configure the switch managed IPv6 information on this page User Configuration Configure new user name and password on this page HM Time Settings Configure SNTP on this page Mi Log Management The switch log information is provided here HM SNMP Management Configure SNMP on this page 4 2 1 System Information The System Info page provides information for the current device information System Info page helps a switch administrator to identify the hardware MAC address software version and system uptime The screens in Figure 4 2 1 amp Figure 4 2 2 appear System Information Information Name Information Vi ue System Name Edit LRP 42205T System Location Edit Default Location System Contact Edit Default Contact MAC Address OO 30 47 22000 7b IP Address 192 168 0 100 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Loader Version 1 0 0 48161 Firmware Version 1 0b1505831 laeo iwe Figure 4 2 1 System Information Page Screenshot 57 PLANET Networking amp Communication The page includes the following fields Object Buttons Edit 4 2 2 IP Configurations System Name System Location System Contact MAC Address IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway Loader Version Loader Date F
275. received on the port this history is cleared if the port link goes down or the port s Admin State is changed and if not the port will be placed in the Guest VLAN Otherwise it will not move to the Guest VLAN but continue transmitting EAPOL Request Identity frames at the rate given by EAPOL Timeout Once in the Guest VLAN the port is considered authenticated and all attached clients on the port are allowed access on this VLAN The switch will not transmit an EAPOL Success frame when entering the Guest VLAN While in the Guest VLAN the switch monitors the link for EAPOL frames and if one such frame is received the switch immediately takes the port out of the Guest VLAN and starts authenticating the supplicant according to the port mode If an EAPOL frame is received the port will never be able to go back into the Guest VLAN if the Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen is disabled The 802 1X Guest VLAN setting screens in Figure 4 9 7 amp Figure 4 9 8 appear 235 PLANET Networking amp Communication The page includes the following fields Buttons User s Manual of LRP 422CST Dotix Guest VLAN Guest VLAN Setting uest VLAN ID UU Enable Guest VLAN Port Setting Port Select Guest VLAN Select Ports Enable Disable Object e Guest VLAN ID e Guest VLAN Enabled e Guest VLAN Port Setting Apply Figure 4 9 7 Guest VLAN Setting Page Screenshot Description This is the value that a port s Port V
276. reen in Figure 4 13 4 appears Ping test Setting IPv6 oe KK 1 9 Default 4 Interval in sec l 1 5 Default 1 size in Ce 8 5120 Default 56 bytes Ping Results Apply Figure 4 13 4 ICMPv6 Ping Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e IP Address The destination IPv6 Address e Count Number of echo requests to send e Interval in sec Send interval for each ICMP packet e Size in bytes The payload size of the ICMP packet Values range from 8bytes to 5120bytes e Ping Results Display the current ping result 338 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 14 RMON RMON is the most important expansion of the standard SNMP RMON is a set of MIB definitions used to define standard network monitor functions and interfaces enabling the communication between SNMP management terminals and remote monitors RMON provides a highly efficient method to monitor actions inside the subnets MID of RMON consists of 10 groups The switch supports the most frequently used groups 1 2 3 and 9 Statistics Maintain basic usage and error statistics for each subnet monitored by the Agent History Record periodical statistic samples available from Statistics Alarm Allow management console users to set any count or integer for sample intervals and alert thresholds for RMON Agent records Event A list of all events generated by RMON
277. rent special group amp source query RX Display current leave TX Display current report TX Display current general query TX Display current special group query TX Display current special group amp source query TX Click to clear the IGMP Snooping Statistics Click to refresh the IGMP Snooping Statistics 188 PLANET ee User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 7 4 MLD Snooping 4 7 4 1 MLD Setting This page provides MLD Snooping related configuration Most of the settings are global whereas the Router Port configuration is related to the current unit as reflected by the page header The MLD Snooping Setting Information and Table screens in Figure 4 7 21 Figure 4 7 22 amp Figure 4 7 23 appear MLD Snooping MLD Snooping MLD Snooping Status Enable Disable MLD Snooping Version y Ve MLD Snooping Report Suppression Enable Disable Apply Figure 4 7 21 MLD Snooping Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e MLD Snooping Status Enable or disable the MLD snooping The default value is Disabled e MLD Snooping Version Sets the MLD Snooping operation version Possible versions are v1 Set MLD Snooping supported MLD version 1 v2 Set MLD Snooping supported MLD version 2 e MLD Snooping Report Limits the membership report traffic sent to multicast capable routers When you Suppression disable report suppression all MLD reports are sent as is to multicast capable r
278. resh l Click to refresh the statistics 333 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST LLDP Port Statistics mort a jp bebe bb b b pP rejp Jon p p b p j ov bp bP b pP rajo p e p p b p efjo ov p pP b p eej b pe p pP b p sein Jon p p bb fp esjo f fof bp lb b The page includes the following fields Object e Port e TX Frame Total e RX Frame Total e RX Frame Discarded e RX Frame Error e RX TLVs Discarded e RX TLVs Unrecognized e RX Ageout Total Figure 4 12 18 LLDP Port Statistics Page Screenshot Description The port on which LLDP frames are received or transmitted The number of LLDP frames transmitted on the port The number of LLDP frames received on the port If an LLDP frame is received on a port and the switch s internal table has run full the LLDP frame is counted and discarded This situation is known as Too Many Neighbors in the LLDP standard LLDP frames require a new entry in the table when the Chassis ID or Remote Port ID is not already contained within the table Entries are removed from the table when a given port links down an LLDP shutdown frame is received or when the entry ages out The number of received LLDP frames containing some kind of error Each LLDP frame can contain multiple pieces of information Known as TLVs TLV is short for Type Length Value If a TLV is malformed it is counted and discarded
279. ription e Remote IP Address Display the current remote IP address e Engine ID Display the current engine ID e Action Delete Delete the remote IP address entry 87 Y PLANET Networking amp Communication 4 3 Port Management User s Manual of LRP 422CST Use the Port Menu to display or configure the LRP Managed Switch s ports This section has the following items Port Configuration LRP Port Configuration Port Counters Bandwidth Utilization Port Mirroring Jumbo Frame Port Error Disable Configuration Port Error Disabled Status Protected Ports EEE SFP Module Information Configures port configuration settings Configures LRP port configuration settings Lists Ethernet and RMON port statistics Displays current bandwidth utilization Sets the source and target ports for mirroring Sets the jumbo frame on the switch Configures port error disable settings Disables port error status Configures protected ports settings Configures EEE settings Displays SFP module information 4 3 1 Port Configuration This page displays current port configurations and status Ports can also be configured here The table has one row for each port on the selected switch in a number of columns which are The Port Configuration screens in Figure 4 3 1A amp Figure 4 3 2A appear Port settings Port Select Flow Control O Enabled Disabled O Enabled Disabled Select Pors 1 enabled O Disables Fiber Ports
280. rmation Name Information Value Figure 4 2 13 Logging Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Logging Service Display the current logging service status 4 2 6 2 Local Log The switch system local log information is provided here The local Log screens in Figure 4 2 14 amp Figure 4 2 15 appear Figure 4 2 14 Local Log Target Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Target The target of the local log entry The following target types are supported Buffered Target the buffer of the local log m File Target the file of the local log e Severity The severity of the local log entry The following severity types are supported E emerg Emergency level of the system unstable for local log alert Alert level of the immediate action needed for local log crit Critical level of the critical conditions for local log error Error level of the error conditions for local log warning Warning level of the warning conditions for local log 68 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST WR notice Notice level of the normal but significant conditions for local log E info Informational level of the informational messages for local log E debug Debug level of the debugging messages for local log Buttons Appl HEH Click to apply changes Local Logging Setting Status Enable But
281. rs or other devices which send port related information to a DHCP server This information can be useful in tracking an IP address back to a physical port DHCP Snooping Overview VLAN ID IP Address MAC Address 1 192168 0 1 00 30 4F 11 22 33 2 192 168 0 2 00 11 22 55 AABB a l l l l A DHE Client DHCP Trust Port Command Usage Network traffic may be disrupted when malicious DHCP messages are received from an outside source DHCP snooping is used to filter DHCP messages received on a non secure interface from outside the network or firewall When DHCP snooping is enabled globally and enabled on a VLAN interface DHCP messages received on an untrusted interface from a device not listed in the DHCP snooping table will be dropped Table entries are only learned for trusted interfaces An entry is added or removed dynamically to the DHCP snooping table when a client receives or releases an IP address from a DHCP server Each entry includes a MAC address IP address lease time VLAN identifier and port identifier When DHCP snooping is enabled DHCP messages entering an untrusted interface are filtered based upon dynamic entries learned via DHCP snooping Filtering rules are implemented as follows 258 PLANET ene User s Manual of LRP 422CST E If the global DHCP snooping is disabled all DHCP packets are forwarded a If DHCP snooping is enabled globally and also enabled on the VLAN where the DHCP
282. s Default 300 seconds 313 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST Buttons Appl HEH Click to apply changes Filtering MAC Status Figure 4 11 6 Dynamic Addresses Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Aging Time Display the current aging time 4 11 4 Dynamic Learned Dynamic MAC Table The Dynamically Learned MAC Table is shown on this page The MAC Table is sorted first by VLAN ID and then by MAC address The Dynamically Learned screens in Figure 4 11 6 amp Figure 4 11 7 appear Port GET d Ivan MAC Address 0000000000 View Clear Figure 4 11 6 Dynamically Learned Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select port from this drop down list e VLAN Select VLAN from this drop down list e MAC Address Physical address associated with this interface 314 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST Buttons View Refreshes the displayed table starting from the Start from MAC address and VLAN input fields Clear Flushes all dynamic entries MAC Address Information MAC Address VLAN nn 40 61 56 04 18 69 Add to Static MAC table Total Entries 1 Figure 4 11 7 MAC Address Information Page Screenshot Object Description e MAC Address The MAC address of the entry e VLAN The VLAN ID of the entry e Type Indicates whether th
283. s are passed on to the port security module which in turn asks all user modules whether to allow this new MAC address to forward or block it For a MAC address to be set in the forwarding state all enabled user modules must unanimously agree on allowing the MAC address to forward If only one chooses to block it it will be blocked until that user module decides otherwise The SSH Settings and Information screens in Figure 4 9 25 amp Figure 4 9 26 appear SSH Settings SoH Settings SSH Service Disable Login Authentication List Default Enable Authentication List Default Password Retry Count U 120 minutes Silent Time 0 0 659535 seconds Apply Disconnect Figure 4 9 25 SSH Settings Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e SSH Service Disable or enable SSH service e Login Authentication List Select login authentication list from this drop down list e Enable Authentication List Select enable authentication list from this drop down list e Session Timeout Set the session timeout value e Password Retry Count Set the password retry count value e Silent Time Set the silent time value Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Disconnect l l Click to disconnect Telnet communication 251 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST SSH Information Information Name Information Value Login Authentication List Enable Authenticat
284. s drop down list Enable or disable MED configuration Configures the information included in the MED TLV field of advertised messages Network Policy This option advertises network policy configuration information aiding in the discovery and diagnosis of VLAN configuration mismatches on a port Improper network policy configurations frequently result in voice quality degradation or complete service disruption Location This option advertises location identification details Inventory This option advertises device details useful for inventory management such as manufacturer model software version and other pertinent information Select MED network policy from this drop down list LLDP MED Port Setting Table User Defined Network Policy Fort LLDP MED Status Location Inventory Application GEZ Enable C e cee feratie ves de de Figure 4 12 13 Port LLDP MED Configuration Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields 329 PLANET e Networking amp Communication Object Interface LLDP MED Status Active Application Location Inventory User s Manual of LRP 422CST Description The switch port number of the logical port Display the current LLDP MED status Display the current active status Display the current application Display the current location Display the current inventory The MED Location Configuration and LLDP MED Port Location Table screens in Figure
285. s not include 93 PLANET Networking amp Communication Single Collision Frames Multiple Collision Frames Deferred Transmissions Late Collision Excessive Collision Frame Too Long Symbol Errors Control In Unknown Opcodes In Pause Frames Out Pause Frames User s Manual of LRP 422CST frames received with frame too long or frame too short error The number of successfully transmitted frames for which transmission is inhibited by exactly one collision A count of successfully transmitted frames for which transmission is inhibited by more than one collision A count of frames for which the first transmission attempt on a particular interface is delayed because the medium was busy The number of times that a collision is detected later than 512 bit times into the transmission of a packet A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails due to excessive collisions This counter does not increase when the interface is operating in full duplex mode A count of frames received on a particular interface that exceeds the maximum permitted frame size The number of received and transmitted symbol errors The number of received control unknown opcodes The number of received pause frames The number of transmitted pause frames 94 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST RMON Counters zoun talue CC e Pais Od Swadcest Packets SC d e C dO
286. s the following fields Object Description e LAG The LAG for the settings contained in the same row e Description Display the current description e Port Type Display the current port type e Enable State Display the current enable state e Speed Display the current speed e Duplex Display the current duplex mode e Flow Control Config Display the current flow control configuration e Flow Control Status Display the current flow control status LACP is available for GE1 GE4 116 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 4 4 LACP Setting This page is used to configure the LACP system priority setting The LACP Setting screens in Figure 4 4 8 amp Figure 4 4 9 appear LACP LACP Setting P 32768 1 699099 Figure 4 4 8 LACP Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e System Priority A value which is used to identify the active LACP The LRP Managed Switch with the lowest value has the highest priority and is selected as the active LACP peer of the trunk group Buttons Appl HEH Click to apply changes LACP Information system Priority 32760 Figure 4 4 9 LACP Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e System Priority Display the current system priority 117 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 4 5 LACP Port Setting
287. s to use network ports The LRP Managed Switch can be configured through an Ethernet connection making sure the manager PC must be set on the same IP subnet address as the LRP Managed Switch For example the default IP address of the LRP Managed Switch is 192 168 0 100 then the manager PC should be set at 192 168 0 x where x is a number between 1 and 254 except 100 and the default subnet mask is 255 255 255 0 If you have changed the default IP address of the LRP Managed Switch to 192 168 1 1 with subnet mask 255 255 255 0 via console then the manager PC should be set at 192 168 1 x where x is a number between 2 and 254 to do the relative configuration on manager PC PC Workstation with Web Browser 192 168 0 x Managed Switch q Des AEA ae veee aee RJ 45 UTP Cable IP Address 192 168 0 100 Figure 4 1 1 Web Management m Logging on the switch 1 Use Internet Explorer 8 0 or above Web browser Enter the factory default IP address to access the Web interface The factory default IP address is as follows http 192 168 0 100 50 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 2 When the following login screen appears please enter the default username admin with password admin or the username password you have changed via console to login the main screen of LRP Managed Switch The login screen in Figure 4 1 2 appears PLANET Retepnrklra amp Cosemunical
288. s whether the operEdge flag should start as being set or cleared The initial operEdge state when a port is initialized e BPDU Filter Control whether a port explicitly configured as Edge will transmit and receive BPDUs e BPDU Guard Control whether a port explicitly configured as Edge will disable itself upon reception of a BPDU The port will enter the error disabled state and will be removed from the active topology e P2P MAC Controls whether the port connects to a point to point LAN rather than a shared medium This can be automatically determined or forced either true or false Transition to the forwarding state is faster for point to point LANs than for shared media This applies to physical ports only Aggregations are always forced Point2Point e Migrate If at any time the switch detects STP BPDUs including Configuration or Topology Change Notification BPDUs it will automatically set the selected interface to forced STP compatible mode However you can also use the Protocol Migration button to manually re check the appropriate BPDU format RSTP or STP compatible to send on the selected interfaces Default Disabled Buttons Appl PPY Click to apply changes By default the system automatically detects the speed and duplex mode used on each port and configures the path cost according to the values shown below Path cost 0 is used to indicate auto configuration mode When the short path cost method is selected an
289. ser s Manual of LRP 422CST Daisy chaining Multiple Nodes PLANET Long Reach PoE solution can easily build a power system for centrally controlled IP cameras in a high availability network infrastructure It gives users the flexibility to expand small area network with BNC T connector for sharing four nodes per port when needed making the LRP 422CST with 4 BNC Long Reach PoE Ports an ideal support for up to 16 IP cameras 100m LRP 101CE A Extenders Ze Coaxial Cable LRP 422CST i Built in Unique PoE Functions for Powered Devices Management As a managed PoE switch for surveillance wireless and VoIP networks the LRP 422CST particularly features the following special POE Management functions to accomplish a highly efficient Long Reach network mM PD Alive Check M Scheduled Power Recycling M PoE Schedule M PoE Usage Monitoring Intelligent Powered Device Alive Check The LRP 422CST can be configured to monitor connected PD Powered Device status in real time via ping action Once the PD stops working and responding the LRP 422CST will resume the PoE port power and bring the PD back to work It will greatly enhance the network reliability through the PoE port resetting the PD s power source and reducing administrator management burden PD Status deg Sadler Good 3399 Ping Request d Ping Echo Alarm Notification YY F Restart PoE device if without response 13 PLANET Networking amp C
290. sers and visitors with their own IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supporting interactive voice services Guest Voice Signaling for use in network topologies that require a different 326 e PLANET Networking amp Communication e VLAN ID e Tag e L2 Priority e DSCP User s Manual of LRP 422CST policy for the guest voice signaling than for the guest voice media This application type should not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Guest Voice application policy Softphone Voice for use by softphone applications on typical data centric devices such as PCs or laptops This class of endpoints frequently does not support multiple VLANs if at all and are typically configured to use an untagged VLAN or a single tagged data specific VLAN When a network policy is defined for use with an untagged VLAN see Tagged flag below then the L2 priority field is ignored and only the DSCP value has relevance Video Conferencing for use by dedicated Video Conferencing equipment and other similar appliances supporting real time interactive video audio services App Streaming Video for use by broadcast or multicast based video content distribution and other similar applications supporting streaming video services that require specific network policy treatment Video applications relying on TCP with buffering would not be an intended use of this application type
291. ss Bandwidth Control Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Ingress Rate Limit Kbps Display the current ingress rate limit 4 8 4 2 Egress Bandwidth Control This page provides to select the egress bandwidth preamble The Egress Bandwidth Control Setting and Status screens in Figure 4 8 18 amp Figure 4 8 19 appear Egress Bandwidth Control Egress Bandwidth Control Settings Select Ports lz Disable Enable Apply Figure 4 8 18 Egress Bandwidth Control Settings Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields 219 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST Object Description e Port Select port number from this drop down list e State Enable or disable the port rate policer The default value is Disabled Rate Kbps Configure the rate for the port policer The default value is unlimited Valid values are in the range 0 to 1000000 Buttons Appl PPY Click to apply changes Egress Bandwidth Control Status Pon Egress RatoLinit bps Figure 4 8 19 Egress Bandwidth Control Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Egress Rate Limit Kbps Display the current egress rate limit 220 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST
292. st e Port Select Select port number from this drop down list e Max Groups Sets the maximum number of multicast groups an interface can join at the same time Range 0 256 Default 256 e Action Sets the action to take when the maximum number of multicast groups for the Buttons Apply interface has been exceeded Default Deny Deny The new multicast group join report is dropped Replace The new multicast group replaces an existing group Click to apply changes 199 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST IGMP Port Max Groups Information Figure 4 7 35 IGMP Port Max Groups Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical port e Max Groups Display the current Max groups e Action Display the current action 4 7 7 Multicast Filter In certain switch applications the administrator may want to control the multicast services that are available to end users For example an IP TV service is based on a specific subscription plan The multicast filtering feature fulfills this requirement by restricting access to specified multicast services on a switch port Multicast filtering enables you to assign a profile to a switch port that specifies multicast groups that are permitted or denied on the port A multicast filter profile can contain one or more or a range of multicast addresses but only o
293. st Display the current designated bridge Display the current internal path cost Display the current port role Display the current port state 170 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 6 8 STP Statistics This page displays STP statistics The STP statistics screen in Figure 4 6 17 appears STP Statistics STP Statistics I ransm itte d I ransm itte d Figure 4 6 17 STP Statistics Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port The switch port number of the logical STP port e Configuration BPDUs Display the current configuration BPDUs received Received e TCN BPDUs Received Display the current TCN BPDUs received e MSTP BPDUs Received Display the current MSTP BPDUs received e Configuration BPDUs Display the configuration BPDUs transmitted Transmitted e TCN BPDUs Transmitted Display the current TCN BPDUs transmitted e MSTP BPDUs Transmitted Display the current BPDUs transmitted 171 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 7 Multicast This section has the following items E Properties Configures multicast properties IGMP Snooping Configures IGMP snooping settings a IGMP Snooping Statistics Displays the IGMP snooping statistics E MLD Snooping Configures MLD snooping settings E MLD Snooping Statistics Displays the MLD snooping statistics E Multicast Throttling Configures multicast throttling se
294. static MAC status entry 4 11 2 MAC Filtering By filtering MAC address the switch can easily filter the pre configured MAC address and reduce the un safety The Static MAC Setting screens in Figure 4 11 3 amp Figure 4 11 4 appear MAC Filtering Setting MAC Address VLAN 1 4094 Add Figure 4 11 3 MAC Filtering Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e MAC Address Physical address associated with this interface e VLAN 1 4096 Indicates the ID of this particular VLAN 312 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST Buttons Add IN Click to add new MAC filtering setting Filtering MAC Status Figure 4 11 4 Statics MAC Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e No This is the number for entries e MAC Address The MAC address for the entry e VLAN The VLAN ID for the entry oer Delete Click to delete static MAC status entry 4 11 3 Dynamic Address Setting By default dynamic entries are removed from the MAC table after 300 seconds The Dynamic Address Setting Status screens in Figure 4 11 5 amp Figure 4 11 6 appear Dynamic Address Setting am Range 10 630 Apply Figure 4 11 5 Dynamic Addresses Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Aging Time The time after which a learned entry is discarded Range 10 630 second
295. stops working and without response the PoE Switch is going to restart PoE port power and bring the PD back to work It will greatly enhance the reliability and reduces administrator management burden PD Status PT PoE Camera No Response Good D gt A A j beam Ping Request d gt gt gt KLEE Ping Request Ping Echo Jl Check alive status for 3 times Alarm Notification Restart PoE device if without response This page provides you with how to configure PD Alive Check The screen in Figure 4 16 5 appears PD Alive Check PD Alive Check EA a e Select Ports lU Disabled Apply PD Alive Check Configuration Figure 4 15 5 PD Alive Check Configuration Screenshot 357 PLANET Networking amp Communication The page includes the following fields Object e Mode e Ping PD IP Address e Interval Time 10 300s e Retry Count 1 5 e Action e Reboot Time 30 180s User s Manual of LRP 422CST Description Allows user to enable or disable per port PD Alive Check function By default all ports are disabled This column allows user to set PoE device IP address for system making ping to the PoE device Please note that the PD s IP address must be set to the same network segment with the PoE Switch This column allows user to set how long system should issue a ping request to PD for detecting whether PD is alive or dead Interval time range is from 10 seconds to 300 seconds This colu
296. t DCHP spoofing attacks The database agent stores the bindings in a file at a configured location When reloading the switch reads the binding file to build the DHCP snooping binding database The switch keeps the file current by updating it when the database changes When a switch learns of new bindings or when it loses bindings the switch immediately updates the entries in the database The switch also updates the entries in the binding file The frequency at which the file is updated is based on a configurable delay and the updates are batched If the file is not updated in a specified time set by the write delay and abort timeout values the update stops The DHCP Snooping Database and Information screens in Figure 4 9 42 amp Figure 4 9 43 appear DHCP Snooping Database DHCP Snooping Database Remote Server La a A A OF Hostname Write Delay a00 15 86400 secondi Timeout 300 0 66400 second Apply Figure 4 9 42 DHCP Snooping Database Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields 265 PLANET Networking amp Communication Object e Database Type e File Name e Remote Server e Write Delay e Timeout Buttons Appl PPY Click to apply changes User s Manual of LRP 422CST Description Select database type The name of file image Fill in your remote server IP address Specify the duration for which the transfer should be delayed after the binding database changes
297. t is incorrect misleading or incomplete we would appreciate your comments and suggestions FCC Warning This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the Instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense CE Mark Warning This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Energy Saving Note of the Device This power required device does not support Standby mode operation For energy saving please remove the power cable to disconnect the device from the power circuit In view of saving the energy and reducing the unnecessary power consumption it is strongly suggested to remove the power connection for the device if this device is not intended to be active WEEE Warning To avoid the potential effects on the environment and human health as a result of the presence of hazardous substa
298. tch can retransmit the request If no response is received from the server after the specified number of attempts authentication fails and network access is not granted When a client logs off it sends an EAPOL logoff message causing the switch port to transition to the unauthorized state If the link state of a port transitions from up to down or if an EAPOL logoff frame is received the port returns to the unauthorized state 231 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 9 1 2 802 1X Setting This page allows you to configure the IEEE 802 1X authentication system The IEEE 802 1X standard defines a port based access control procedure that prevents unauthorized access to a network by requiring users to first submit credentials for authentication One or more central servers the backend servers determine whether the user is allowed access to the network These backend RADIUS servers are configured on the Security gt 802 1X Access Control 802 1X Setting page The IEEE802 1X standard defines port based operation but non standard variants overcome security limitations as shall be explored below The 802 1X Setting and Information screens in Figure 4 9 3 amp Figure 4 9 4 appear 02 1X Setting 802 1X Setting Disable Enable Apply Figure 4 9 3 802 1X Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e 802 1X Indicates if NAS is gl
299. te Click to delete ACL name entry 4 10 2 MAC based ACE An ACE consists of several parameters Different parameter options are displayed depending on the frame type that you select The MAC based ACE screens in Figure 4 10 3 amp Figure 4 10 4 appear MAC Based ACE MAC Based ACE Ranger 1 2147483647 1 is first processed Permit Deny O Shutdown Any O user Defined Us for matching Os for no matching Any User Defined Ranger Add Figure 4 10 3 MAC based ACE Page Screenshot 294 PLANET Networking amp Communication The page includes the following fields Object ACL Name Sequence Action DA MAC DA MAC Value DA MAC Mask SA MAC SA MAC Value SA MAC Mask VLAN ID 802 1p 802 1p Value 802 1p Mask EtherType Range 0x05DD OxFFFF User s Manual of LRP 422CST Description Select ACL name from this drop down list Set the ACL sequence Indicates the forwarding action of the ACE E Permit Frames matching the ACE may be forwarded and learned E Deny Frames matching the ACE are dropped WM Shutdown Port shutdown is disabled for the ACE Specify the destination MAC filter for this ACE E Any No DA MAC filter is specified WR User Defined If you want to filter a specific destination MAC address with this ACE choose this value A field for entering a DA MAC value appears When User Defined is selected for the DA MAC filter you can
300. te a protocol group for each of the protocols you want to assign to a VLAN using the Protocol VLAN Configuration page 3 Then map the protocol for each interface to the appropriate VLAN using the Protocol VLAN Port Configuration page This page allows you to configure protocol based VLAN Group Setting The protocol based VLAN screens in Figure 4 5 9 amp Figure 4 5 10 appear Protocol VLAN Group Setting Add Protocol VLAN Group Frame Type Ethernet_Il Protocol Value OxO600 0xFFFE IR Figure 4 5 9 Add Protocol VLAN Group Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Group ID Protocol Group ID assigned to the Special Protocol VLAN Group e Frame Type Frame Type can have one of the following values E Ethernet Il WR lEEE802 3_ LLC Other E RFC_1042 Note On changing the Frame type field valid value of the following text field will 136 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST vary depending on the new frame type you selected e Protocol Value Valid value that can be entered in this text field depends on the option selected 0x0600 0xFFFE from the preceding Frame Type selection menu Valid values for frame type ranges from 0x0600 Oxfffe Buttons Appl PPY Click to apply changes Protocol VLAN Group State Cc ee Protocol Value Figure 4 5 10 Protocol VLAN Group State Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Descript
301. ter a Leave or LeaveAll message has been issued the applicants can rejoin before the port actually leaves the group Range 45 32760 centiseconds Default 60 centiseconds e LeaveAll Timeout The interval between sending out a LeaveAll query message for VLAN group participants and the port leaving the group This interval should be considerably larger than the Leave Time to minimize the amount of traffic generated by nodes rejoining the group Range 65 32765 centiseconds Default 1000 centiseconds Timer settings must follow this rule 2 X join timer lt leave timer lt leaveAll timer Buttons Appl HEH Click to apply changes PS GVRP Informations Join Timeout 200 millisecond Leave Timeout BOO millisecond LeaveAll Timeout 10000 millisecond Figure 4 5 14 GVRP Global Setting Page Screenshot 140 PLANET Networking amp Communication The page includes the following fields Object e GVRP Status e Join Timeout e Leave Timeout User s Manual of LRP 422CST Description Display the current GVRP status Display the current join timeout parameter Display the current leave timeout parameter e LeaveAll Timeout Display the current leaveall timeout parameter 4 5 11 GVRP Port Setting The GVRP Port Setting Status screens in Figure 4 5 15 amp Figure 4 5 16 appear GVRP Port Setting Port Settings Port Select GVRP Enabled Registration Mode VLAN Creation Select Ports Enable
302. ter you press Apply ICMP packets are transmitted and the sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed upon reception of a reply The page refreshes automatically until responses to all packets are received or until a timeout occurs The ICMP Ping screen in Figure 4 13 3 appears Ping Test Setting IP T CL or hostname Count 1 5 Default 4 EA 1 5 Default 1 in sec Size in bytes 8 5120 Default 56 Ping Results Apply Figure 4 13 3 ICMP Ping Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e IP Address The destination IP Address e Count Number of echo requests to send e Interval in sec Send interval for each ICMP packet e Size in bytes The payload size of the ICMP packet Values range from 8bytes to 5120bytes e Ping Results Display the current ping result 337 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST Be sure the target IP Address is within the same network subnet of the switch or you have to set up the correct gateway IP address 4 13 4 IPv6 Ping Test This page allows you to issue ICMPv6 PING packets to troubleshoot IPv6 connectivity issues After you press Apply 5 ICMPv6 packets are transmitted and the sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed upon reception of a reply The page refreshes automatically until responses to all packets are received or until a timeout occurs The ICMPv6 Ping sc
303. tered Emerg Alert Grit Error Warning Motice Figure 4 2 15 Local Log Setting Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Status Display the current local log state e Target Display the current local log target e Severity Display the current local log severity e Action Delete Delete the current status 69 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 2 6 3 Remote Syslog Configure remote syslog on this page The Remote Syslog page allows you to configure the logging of messages that are sent to syslog servers or other management stations You can also limit the event messages sent to only those messages below a j IP 192 168 0 100 specified level Event Log Syslog Server IP 192 168 0 200 Port 514 The Remote Syslog screens in Figure 4 2 16 amp Figure 4 2 17 appear Remote Logging Remote Logging Setting Figure 4 2 16 Remote Log Target Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Server Address Provide the remote syslog IP address of this switch e Server Port Provide the port number of remote syslog server Default Port no 514 e Severity The severity of the local log entry The following severity types are supported H emerg Emergency level of the system unstable for local log E alert Alert level of the immediate action needed for local log 70 PLANET Networki
304. terfaces are untrusted Enable or disable to checks the source MAC address in the Ethernet header against the sender MAC address in the ARP body This check is performed on both ARP requests and responses When enabled packets with different MAC addresses are classified as invalid and are dropped Enable or disable to checks the destination MAC address in the Ethernet header against the target MAC address in ARP body This check is performed for ARP responses When enabled packets with different MAC addresses are classified as invalid and are dropped Enable or disable to checks the source and destination IP addresses of ARP packets The all zero all one or multicast IP addresses are considered invalid and the corresponding packets are discarded Enable or disable to check all zero IP addresses 274 PL Networking A NET User s Manual of LRP 422CST DAI Port Setting Src MAC Chk Dst MAC Chk IP Allow Zero The page includes the following fields Object e Port e Type e Src Mac Chk e Dst Mac Chk e IP Chk e IP Allow Zero Figure 4 9 57 DAI Port Setting Page Screenshot Description The switch port number of the logical port Display the current port type Display the current Src Mac Chk status Display the current Dst Mac Chk status Display the current IP Chk status Display the current IP allow zero status 275 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422C
305. the current access profile name Display the current priority Display the current management method Display the current action Display the current port list Display the current source IPv4 address Display the current source IPv4 mask Display the current source IPv6 address Display the current source IPv6 prefix Edit Click to edit profile rule parameter Click Delete to delete profile rule entry 256 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 9 6 2 Access Rules The access profile screens in Figure 4 9 33 amp Figure 4 9 34 appear Access Profile active ODdeactive Apply Figure 4 9 33 Access Profile Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Access Profile Select access profile from this drop down list Buttons Apply Click to apply changes Access Profiles Table Figure 4 9 34 Access Profile Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Access Profile Display the current access profile e Delete Delet Click EIETE Io delete access profile entry 257 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 9 7 DHCP Snooping 4 9 7 1 DHCP Snooping Overview The addresses assigned to DHCP clients on unsecure ports can be carefully controlled using the dynamic bindings registered with DHCP Snooping DHCP snooping allows a switch to protect a network from rogue DHCP serve
306. thentication and none privacy E priv Authentication and privacy Note The Security Level applies to SNNPv3 only e Read View Name Read view name is the name of the view in which you can only view the contents of the agent The allowed string length is 1 to 16 e Write View Name Write view name is the name of the view in which you enter data and configure the contents of the agent The allowed string length is 1 to 16 e Notify View Name Notify view name is the name of the view in which you specify a notify inform or trap Buttons Add Click to add a new access entry 19 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST B Check to delete the entry Access Group Status Security Model Security Level Read View Name Notify View Name Figure 4 2 28 SNMP View Table Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Group Name Display the current SNMP access group name e Security Model Display the current security model e Security Level Display the current security level e Read View Name Display the current read view name e Write View Name Display the current write view name e Notify View Name Display the current notify view name e Action Delete Delete the access group entry 80 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 2 7 6 SNMP User Configure SNMPv3 users table on this page Each SNMPv3 user is def
307. tination File Apply Figure 4 1 7 Save Configuration Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Running Configuration Refers to the running configuration sequence use in the switch In switch the running configuration file stores in the RAM In the current version the running configuration sequence running config can be saved from the RAM to FLASH by saving Source File Running Configuration to Destination File Startup Configuration so that the running configuration sequence becomes the startup 54 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST configuration file which is called configuration save To prevent illicit file upload and easier configuration switch mandates the name of running configuration file to be running config e Startup Configuration Refers to the configuration sequence used in switch startup Startup configuration file stores in nonvolatile storage corresponding to the so called configuration save If the device supports multi config file name the configuration file to be cfg file the default is startup cfg If the device does not support multi config file mandates the name of startup configuration file to be startup config e Backup Configuration The backup configuration is empty in FLASH please save the backup configuration first by Maintenance gt Backup Manager Buttons Appl HE Click to save configurat
308. tion Frequency Band 2 28MHz Long Reach PoE RG 6 U Data Rate Mbps LRP 101CE Interfaces Distance TX RX PoE Output W 25 degrees C oom ei ms 800m es eu 9 Performance mn 37 an The actual data rate and PoE output vary on the quality of the copper wire and environmental factors The performance result above is based on the testing via the RG 6 U coaxial cable TX The LRP 422CST to the LRP 101CE RX The LRP 101CE to the LRP 422CST Up to 4 LRP extenders within 1km RG 6 U coaxial cable Multiple Nodes LRP Compatibility The actual extender nodes vary on the quality of the copper wire and environmental factors LRP 101CE 1 Port 10 100TX PoE PSE 1 Port Coax Long Reach PoE 20 PLANET lt lt Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST Console Switch Architecture Address Table Shared Data Butter IEEE 802 3x pause frame for full duplex Flow Control Back pressure for half duplex lt 5 sec System reboot Reset Button gt 5 sec Factory default ESD Protection 6KV DC IP30 aluminum case Installation DIN rail kit and wall mount kit Removable 6 pin terminal block for power input Pin 1 2 for Power 1 Pin 3 4 for fault alarm Pin 5 6 for Power 2 Connector One relay output for power failure Alarm Relay current carry ability 1A 24V AC Power 1 Green LNK ACT Green LED Power 2 Green PoE In use Orange Fault Alarm Red P
309. tlines what is communicated between a multicast router and a multicast group member using IGMP A host sends an IGMP report to join a group A host will never send a report when it wants to leave a group for version 1 A host will send a leave report when it wants to leave a group for version 2 Multicast routers send IGMP queries to the all hosts group address 224 0 0 1 periodically to see whether any group members exist on their sub networks If there is no response from a particular group the router assumes that there are no group members on the network The Time to Live TTL field of query messages is set to 1 so that the queries will not be forwarded to other sub networks IGMP version 2 introduces some enhancements such as a method to elect a multicast queried for each LAN an explicit leave message and query messages that are specific to a given group 176 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST The states a computer will go through to join or to leave a multicast group are shown below Non Member Leave Group Send Report Start Timer Leave Group Query Received Start Timer Delaying Member Report Received Idle Member Stop Timer Timer Expried Send report Figure 4 7 6 IGMP State Transitions a IGMP Querier A router or multicast enabled switch can periodically ask their hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic If there is more than
310. to display information about the switch such as its MAC address chassis ID management IP address and port information The Local Device Summary and Port Status screens in Figure 4 12 7 amp Figure 4 12 8 appear LLDP Local Device Local Device Summary The page includes the following fields Chassis ID Subtype Chassis ID system Name MAL Address O0 30 4F 14 00 01 LRP 4220 ST Figure 4 12 7 Local Device Summary Page Screenshot Object Chassis ID Subtype Chassis ID System Name System Description Capabilities Supported Capabilities Enabled Port ID Subtype Description Display the current chassis ID subtype Display the current chassis ID Display the current system name Display the current system description Display the current capabilities supported Display the current capabilities enabled Display the current port ID subtype 322 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST Detail 2 3 sr EE RER ees FE4 TX RX Figure 4 12 8 Port Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Interface The switch port number of the logical port e LLDP Status Display the current LLDP status e LLDP MED Status Display the current LLDP MED Status 323 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 12 5 LLDP Remote Device This page provides a status overview for all LLDP remote dev
311. to match D Range 0 255 Any User Defined Sange 0 255 Add Figure 4 10 7 IP based ACE Page Screenshot 298 PLANET Networking amp Communication The page includes the following fields Object e ACL Name e Sequence e Action e Protocol e Source IP Address e Source IP Address Value e Source IP Wildcard Mask e Destination IP Address e Destination IP Address Value e Destination IP Wildcard Mask e Source Port User s Manual of LRP 422CST Description Select ACL name from this drop down list Set the ACL sequence Indicates the forwarding action of the ACE E Permit Frames matching the ACE may be forwarded and learned E Deny Frames matching the ACE are dropped RW Shutdown Port shutdown is disabled for the ACE Specify the protocol filter for this ACE E Any IP No protocol filter is specified RW Select from list If you want to filter a specific protocol with this ACE choose this value and select protocol for this drop down list Protocol ID to match If you want to filter a specific protocol with this ACE choose this value and set correct protocol ID Specify the Source IP address filter for this ACE mM Any No source IP address filter is specified WR User Defined If you want to filter a specific source IP address with this ACE choose this value A field for entering a source IP address value appears When User Defined is selected for the
312. tting Setting S Multicast Filter Configures multicast filter 4 7 1 Properties This page provides multicast properties related configuration The multicast Properties and Information screen in Figure 4 7 1 amp Figure 4 7 2 appear Properties Properties Setting Unknown Multicast Action Drop Flood Router Port Apply Figure 4 7 1 Properties Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Unknown Multicast Unknown multicast traffic method Action Drop flood or send to router port Buttons Apply Click to apply changes 172 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST Properties Informations Information Name Information Value Unknown Multicast Action Forwarding Method For IPv4 Forwarding Method For IPv6 Figure 4 7 2 Properties Information Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Unknown Multicast Action Display the current unknown multicast action status e Forward Method For IPv4 Display the current IPv4 multicast forward method e Forward Method For IPv6 Display the current IPv6 multicast forward method 173 PLANET nner User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 7 2 IGMP Snooping The Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP lets host and routers share information about multicast groups memberships IGMP snooping is a switch feature that monitors the exchange of IGMP messages and copies the
313. twork administrator such as optical output power optical input power temperature laser bias current and transceiver supply voltage 16 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 1 3 How to Use This Manual This User Manual is structured as follows Section 2 INSTALLATION The section explains the functions of the Switch and how to physically install the LRP Managed Switch Section 3 SWITCH MANAGEMENT The section contains the information about the software function of the LRP Managed Switch Section 4 WEB CONFIGURATION The section explains how to manage the LRP Managed Switch by Web interface Section 5 SWITCH OPERATION The chapter explains how to do the switch operation of the LRP Managed Switch Section 6 TROUBLESHOOTING The chapter explains how to troubleshoot the LRP Managed Switch Appendix A The section contains cable information of the LRP Managed Switch 1 4 Product Features Le Physical Port HM 4100Mbps BNC female ports with Long Reach PoE Injector function 2 10 100 1000BASE T Gigabit RJ45 copper ports 2 100 1000BASE X mini GBIC SFP slots RJ45 console interface for switch basic management and setup Long Reach Power over Ethernet Mi Supports PoE power up to 36 watts for each PoE port Mi Remote power feeding up to 1 kilometer with 5C2V RG6 750 coaxial cable Mi Long Reach PoE Management Total Long Reach PoE power budget control Per port Long Reach PoE function
314. twork devices or the host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs Then assign ports on the other VLAN aware network devices along the path that will carry this traffic to the same VLAN s either manually or dynamically using GVRP However if you want a port on this switch to participate in one or more VLANs but none of the intermediate network devices nor the host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs then you should add this port to the VLAN as an untagged port VLAN tagged frames can pass through VLAN aware or VLAN unaware network interconnection devices but the VLAN tags should be stripped off before passing it on to any end node host that does not support VLAN tagging Mi VLAN Classification When the switch receives a frame it classifies the frame in one of two ways If the frame is untagged the switch assigns the frame to an associated VLAN based on the default VLAN ID of the receiving port But if the frame is tagged the switch uses the tagged VLAN ID to identify the port broadcast domain of the frame WW Port Overlapping Port overlapping can be used to allow access to commonly shared network resources among different VLAN groups such as file servers or printers Note that if you implement VLANs which do not overlap but still need to communicate you can connect them by enabled routing on this switch Mi Untagged VLANs Untagged or static VLANs are typically used to reduce broadcast traffic and to in
315. tworking amp Communication e Gateway e DHCPv6 Client Buttons Apply User s Manual of LRP 422CST Provide the IPv6 gateway address of this switch To enable this LRP Managed Switch to accept a configuration from a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol version 6 DHCPv6 server By default the LRP Managed Switch does not perform DHCP v6 client actions DHCPV 6 clients request the delegation of long lived prefixes that they can push to individual local hosts Click to apply changes Pv6 Information Auto Configuration Enable Pv muse Gateway Ice le The page includes the following fields Object e Auto Configuration IPv6 In Use Address IPv6 In Use Router IPv6 Static Address IPv6 Static Router DHCPv 6 Client Figure 4 2 5 Pv6 Information Page Screenshot Description Display the current auto configuration state Display the current IPv6 in use address Display the current in use gateway Display the current IPv6 static address Display the current IPv6 static gateway Display the current DHCPVv 6 client status 61 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 2 4 User Configuration This page provides an overview of the current users and privilege type Currently the only way to login as another user on the Web server is to close and reopen the browser After the setup is completed please press the Apply button to take effect Please login Web interfac
316. ubject and must be fully researched and understood It is possible to cause serious degradation of the performance of the network if the Spanning Tree is incorrectly configured Please read the following before making any changes from the default values The Switch STP performs the following functions E Creates a single spanning tree from any combination of switching or bridging elements a Creates multiple spanning trees from any combination of ports contained within a single switch in user specified groups a Automatically reconfigures the spanning tree to compensate for the failure addition or removal of any element in the tree a Reconfigures the spanning tree without operator intervention Bridge Protocol Data Units For STP to arrive at a stable network topology the following information is used a The unique switch identifier a The path cost to the root associated with each switch port a The port identifier STP communicates between switches on the network using Bridge Protocol Data Units BPDUs Each BPDU contains the following information The unique identifier of the switch that the transmitting switch currently believes is the root switch a The path cost to the root from the transmitting port 152 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST a The port identifier of the transmitting port The switch sends BPDUs to communicate and construct the spanning tree topology All switches connecte
317. uery RX Display the current leave TX Display the current report TX Display the current general query TX Display the current special group query TX Display the current special group amp source query TX Click to clear the MLD Snooping Statistics Click to refresh the MLD Snooping Statistics 198 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 7 6 Multicast Throttling Setting Multicast throttling sets a maximum number of multicast groups that a port can join at the same time When the maximum number of groups is reached on a port the switch can take one of two actions either deny or replace If the action is set to deny any new multicast join reports will be dropped If the action is set to replace the switch randomly removes an existing group and replaces it with the new multicast group Once you have configured multicast profiles you can assign them to interfaces on the LRP Managed Switch Also you can set the multicast throttling number to limit the number of multicast groups an interface can join at the same time The MAX Group and Information screens in Figure 4 7 34 amp Figure 4 7 35 appear Multicast Port Max Groups Max Groups and Action Setting IP Type Port Select Action Apply Figure 4 7 34 Max Groups and Action Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e IP Type Select IPv4 or IPv6 from this drop down li
318. unication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 8 Quality of Service 4 8 1 Understand QoS Quality of Service QoS is an advanced traffic prioritization feature that allows you to establish control over network traffic QoS enables you to assign various grades of network service to different types of traffic such as multi media video protocol specific time critical and file backup traffic QoS reduces bandwidth limitations delay loss and jitter It also provides increased reliability for delivery of your data and allows you to prioritize certain applications across your network You can define exactly how you want the switch to treat selected applications and types of traffic You can use QoS on your system to e Control a wide variety of network traffic by e Classifying traffic based on packet attributes e Assigning priorities to traffic for example to set higher priorities to time critical or business critical applications e Applying security policy through traffic filtering e Provide predictable throughput for multimedia applications such as video conferencing or voice over IP by minimizing delay and jitter e Improve performance for specific types of traffic and preserve performance as the amount of traffic grows e Reduce the need to constantly add bandwidth to the network e Manage network congestion To implement QoS on your network you need to carry out the following actions 1 Define a service level to determine the
319. urrent P2P MAC status 4 6 4 CIST Instance Setting This Page allows you to configure CIST instance settings The CIST Instance Setting and Information screens in Figure 4 6 8 amp Figure 4 6 9 appear CIST Instance Setting CIST Instance Setting Priority Max Hops Forward Delay Max Age Tx Hold Count Hello Time Apply Figure 4 6 8 CIST Instance Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Priority Controls the bridge priority Lower numeric values have better priority The bridge priority plus the MSTI instance number concatenated with the 6 byte MAC address of the switch forms a Bridge Identifier 163 PLANET Networking amp Communication e Max Hops e Forward Delay e Max Age e Tx Hold Count e Hello Time Buttons Apply Click to apply changes User s Manual of LRP 422CST For MSTP operation this is the priority of the CIST Otherwise this is the priority of the STP RSTP bridge This defines the initial value of remaining Hops for MSTI information generated at the boundary of an MSTI region It defines how many bridges a root bridge can distribute its BPDU information Valid values are in the range 6 to 40 hops The delay used by STP Bridges to transition Root and Designated Ports to Forwarding used in STP compatible mode Valid values are in the range 4 to 30 seconds Default 15 Minimum The higher of 4 or Max Message Age 2 1
320. uto Negotiation Check the configured column to use flow control This setting is related to the setting for Configured Link Speed Buttons Appl PPY Click to apply changes D inti Enable Link e d Flow Ctrl Flow Ctrl EE State Status pee Contig Status Enabled up Ato00M amp Full Disabled Disabled Enabled DOT Disabled Disabled Enabled DOT Disabled Disabled Figure 4 3 2A Port Status Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields 89 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST Object Description e Port This is the logical port number for this row e Description Click Edit to indicate the port name e Enable State Display the current port state e Link Status Display the current link status e Speed Display the current speed status of the port e Duplex Display the current duplex status of the port e Flow Control Configuration Display the current flow control configuration of the port e Flow Control Status Display the current flow control status of the port 4 3 2 LRP Port Configuration This page displays current LRP port configurations and status Ports can also be configured here The table has one row for each port on the selected switch in a number of columns which are The Port Configuration screens in Figure 4 3 1B amp Figure 4 3 2B appear Port settings Port Select Enabled Select Ports Enabled Disabled Figure 4 3 1B LRP Port Settings Page Screenshot
321. utton to take effect The meaning of the 3 buttons above are shown below E Update Device use the current setting on one single device M Update Multi use the current setting on multi devices MM Update All use the current setting on whole devices in the list The same functions mentioned above also can be found in Option tools bar 3 To click the Control Packet Force Broadcast function it allows you to assign a new setting value to the Web Smart Switch under a different IP subnet address 4 Press the Connect to Device button and the Web login screen appears in Figure 3 1 4 5 Press the Exit button to shut down the Planet Smart Discovery Utility 49 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST 4 WEB CONFIGURATION This section introduces the configuration and functions of the Web based management About Web based Management The LRP Managed Switch offers management features that allow users to manage the LRP Managed Switch from anywhere on the network through a standard browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer The Web based Management supports Internet Explorer 8 0 It is based on Java Applets with an aim to reduce network bandwidth consumption enhance access speed and present an easy viewing screen By default IE8 0 or later version does not allow Java Applets to open sockets The user has to A explicitly modify the browser setting to enable Java Applet
322. vant terms Tagging The act of putting 802 1Q VLAN information into the header of a packet _Untagging The act of stripping 802 1Q VLAN information out of the packet header WW 802 1Q VLAN Tags The figure below shows the 802 1Q VLAN tag There are four additional octets inserted after the source MAC address Their presence is indicated by a value of 0x8100 in the Ether Type field When a packet s Ether Type field is equal to 0x8100 the packet carries the IEEE 802 1Q 802 1p tag The tag is contained in the following two octets and consists of 3 bits of user priority 1 bit of Canonical Format Identifier CFI used for encapsulating Token Ring packets so they can be carried across Ethernet backbones and 12 bits of VLAN ID VID The 3 bits of user priority are used by 802 1p The VID is the VLAN identifier and is used by the 802 1Q standard Because the VID is 12 bits long 4094 unique VLAN can be identified The tag is inserted into the packet header making the entire packet longer by 4 octets All of the information originally contained in the packet is retained 802 1Q Tag User Priority CFI VLAN ID VID 3 bits 1 bits 12 bits TPID Tag Protocol Identifier TCI Tag Control Information 2 bytes 2 bytes Destination Source Ethernet Preamble VLAN TAG FCS Address Address Type 6 bytes 6 bytes 4 bytes 2 bytes 46 1500 bytes 4 bytes 124 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 42
323. vices It provides IPv6 IPv4 dual stack management and built in L2 L4 Gigabit Switching engine along with 4 BNC ports with Long Reach PoE Injector function 2 Gigabit copper ports and 2 extra 100 1000BASE X SFP fiber slots Each of the BNC ports provides 36 watts of power with a total power budget of up to 150 watts As an advanced PoE switch the LRP 422CST features intelligent PoE functions to improve the availability of critical applications It provides a quick safe and cost effective PoE network solution to upgrading the existing coaxial cable infrastructure from the analog system to the HD IP surveillance system Extend Power and Data with Fantastic 4 BNG Ports PE T E Redundant aoa SE Power Data Power Coaxial VP G PAD ge LRP Extender PoE IP Camera Environmentally Hardened Design With IP30 aluminum industrial case protection the LRP 422CST provides a high level of immunity against electromagnetic interference and heavy electrical surges which are usually found on plant floors or in curb side traffic control cabinets It also possesses an integrated power supply source with wide range of voltages 48 to 56V DC for worldwide high availability applications requiring dual or backup power inputs Being able to operate under the temperature range from 40 to 75 degrees C the LRP 422CST can be placed in almost any difficult environment 11 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST
324. witch allows each of the connected PoE IP cameras to reboot at a specified time each week Therefore it will reduce the chance of IP camera crash resulting from buffer overflow 354 R A Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST Automatically Reboot Automatically Reboot Every Monday 03 00 Every Friday 23 00 ON CEER S oon S PoE PoE a E Sg Geer oan ON OFF ON OFF ON Allows scheduled power recycling The screen in Figure 4 16 4 appears PoE Schedule PoE Schedule Configuration Add New Rule Apply Sta Tue Won Gun Hour SS PoE Schedule PoE Reboot 00h 01h O2h Osh 04h 05h 06h OFA OGR Osh 10h 11h 12h ish 14h 15h 16h 17h 18h Wh 20h 21h 22h 23h OOh Figure 4 16 4 PoE Schedule Screenshot Please press the Add New Rule button to start setting PoE Schedule function You have to set PoE schedule to profile and then go back to PoE Port Configuration and select Schedule mode from per port PoE Mode option to enable you to indicate 355 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST which schedule profile could be applied to the PoE port The page includes the following fields Object e Profile e Week Day e Start Hour e Start Min e End Hour e End Min e Reboot Enable e Reboot Only e Reboot Hour e Reboot Min Buttons Add New Rule Description Set the schedule profile mode Possible profiles
325. y Figure 4 14 5 RMON Alarm Table Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Select Index Select index from this drop down list to create the new index or modify the index 344 vi PLANET Networking amp Communication e Index e Sample Port e Sample Variable User s Manual of LRP 422CST Indicates the index of the alarm entry Select port from this drop down list Indicates the particular variable to be sampled the possible variables are DropEvents The total number of events in which packets were dropped due to lack of resources Octets The number of received and transmitted good and bad bytes Includes FCS but excludes framing bits Pkts The total number of frames bad broadcast and multicast received and transmitted BroadcastPkKts The total number of good frames received that were directed to the broadcast address Note that this does not include multicast packets MulticastPkts The total number of good frames received that were directed to this multicast address CRCAlignErrors The number of CRC alignment errors FCS or alignment errors UndersizePkts The total number of frames received that were less than 64 octets long excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and were otherwise well formed OversizePkts The total number of frames received that were longer than 1518 octets excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and were otherwise well
326. y has two member ports on the switch the learning can be disabled for the particular VLAN and can therefore rely on flooding as the forwarding mechanism between the two ports This way the MAC table requirements is reduced Edit Interface Setting The Edit Interface Setting Status screens in Figure 4 5 5 amp Figure 4 5 6 appear 130 PLANET Networking amp Communication User s Manual of LRP 422CST Interface Settings Edit Interface Setting Port Select Seen a PVID Accepted Type Ingress Filtering Uplink TPID Hybrid e AN Select Ports ACCESS Tanan Enable Enable Trunk Disable Disable Untag Only Tunnel Figure 4 5 5 Edit Interface Setting Page Screenshot The page includes the following fields Object Description e Port Select Select port number from this drop down list to set VLAN port setting e Interface VLAN Mode Set the port in access trunk hybrid and tunnel mode E Trunk means the port allows traffic of multiple VLANs M Access indicates the port belongs to one VLAN only E Hybrid means the port allows the traffic of multi VLANs to pass in tag or untag mode E Tunnel configures IEEE 802 1Q tunneling for a downlink port to another device within the customer network e PVID Allows you to assign PVID to selected port The PVID will be inserted into all untagged frames entering the ingress port The PVID must be the same as the VLAN ID that the port belongs to VLAN group or the untagged traf

User`s Manual - ASM spol. s ro

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents